PROJECT MANUAL ngineering upport roup , LLC REPLACE ...

SET NO.

PROJECT MANUAL

FOR

CONSTRUCTION OF

REPLACE FITNESS CENTER A/C CAMP FRETTERD READINESS CENTER

SITE ADDRESS: 5404 RUE SAINT DRIVE

REISTERSTOWN, MARYLAND 21136 BALTIMORE COUNTY

FOR

MARYLAND DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES

DGS PROJECT NO. M-139-170-003 DATE: July 12, 2021

PROJECT CLASSIFICATION B

STATE OF MARYLAND

DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES BOARD OF PUBLIC WORKS Ellington Churchill, Jr., Secretary Larry Hogan, Governor 301 West Preston Street Peter Franchot, Comptroller Baltimore, Maryland 21201 Nancy K. Kopp, Treasurer

A Squared Plus Engineering Support Group, LLC 2601 Emory Road Building 1, Suite B

Finksburg, Maryland 21048 Phone: 443-977-9741 Fax: 410-861-5426

MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES ARE ENCOURAGED

TO RESPOND TO THIS SOLICITATION

NOTE: Electronic bidding via eMarylandMarketplace To register for eMarylandMarketplace membership,

contact the EMM Helpdesk at 410-767-1492

2

+E , LLCS Gngineering upport roup

July 12, 2021 Replace Fitness Center A/C Camp Fretterd Readiness Center

A Squared Plus Engineering Support Group, LLC DGS M-139-170-003

Table of Contents 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 0 – PROCUREMENT & CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Notice To Bidders – Solicitation Fact Sheet (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

Instructions to Bidders for Construction Projects (March 2007) (eMarylandMarketplace

attachment)

General Conditions for Construction Contracts (July 1, 2018) (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

Bid Proposal Affidavit (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

Contractors Questionnaire

Bid Bond, if applicable (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

Minority Business Enterprise Utilization Procedures (November 2017) (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

MBE Attachment D-1A Forms (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

List of Prevailing Wage Rates, if applicable

Addenda, if any (eMarylandMarketplace attachment)

List of Drawings

Pre-Bid Conference/Site Visit – Refer to: State Finance and Procurement Article

§14-302(a)(7)(v) and COMAR 21.11.03.09.C.(2)(e).

000100 List Of Contract Documents

002200 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary of Work

012500 Substitutions

012600 Contract Modifications Procedures

012900 Payment Procedures 013000 Administration of Contract

013100 Project Management and Coordination

013111 CAD File Transfer

013200 Construction Progress Documentation

013233 Photographic Documentation

013300 Submittal Procedures

014200 Reference Standards and Definitions

014500 Quality Requirements

015000 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls

015500 Vehicular Access and Parking

015721 Indoor Air Quality Controls

015800 Project Identification and Signs

016000 Product Requirements

017300 Execution

017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

017700 Closeout Procedures



Table of Contents 2

017823 Operation and Maintenance Data

017839 Project Record Documents

017843 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials

017900 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION

022300 Site Clearing

022400 Dewatering

023000 Earthwork

029200 Lawns and Grasses

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

078413 Penetration Firestopping

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL

230500 Common Work Results For HVAC

230513 Common Motor Requirements For HVAC Equipment

230548 Vibration Controls For HVAC Piping and Equipment

230553 Identification For HVAC Equipment

230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing For HVAC

230700 HVAC Insulation

230900 Building Management System

230993 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls

232300 Refrigerant Piping

233113 Metal Ducts

233300 Air Duct Accessories

233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles

237223 Rooftop Units

238126 Split System Air Conditioners



Table of Contents 3

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 Common work Results for Electrical

260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

260523 Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables

260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

260553 Identification for Electrical Systems

262416 Panelboards

262726 Wiring Devices

262813 Fuses

262816 Enclosed Switches

262913 Enclosed Controllers

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280513 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

283111 Fire Alarm



Listing of Contract Documents 000100 - 1

SECTION 000100 - LISTING OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - PROJECT MANUAL

The bidding and contractual requirements and written descriptions of the work are bound in one volume

entitled "Project Submission Forms for Construction of the Replace Fitness Center A/C Camp Fretterd

Readiness Center, 5404 Rue Saint Drive, Reisterstown, Maryland 21136” and dated July 12, 2021.

PART 2 - DRAWINGS

Graphic descriptions of the work are contained in a set of drawings entitled, “Replace Fitness Center A/C

Camp Fretterd Readiness Center, 5404 Rue Saint Drive, Reisterstown, Maryland 21136” and dated July

12, 2021.

CS-1 COVER SHEET

S-1 FLOOR PLAN, DETAIL & GENERAL NOTES

S-2 SECTIONS & DETAILS

M-1 FLOOR PLAN-MECHANICAL

M-2 SECTION AND DETAILS

M-3 SCHEDULES

M-4 LEGEND

E-1 FLOOR PLANS-ELECTRICAL

E-2 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN

E-3 RISER DIAGRAMS

E-4 SCHEDULES AND DETAILS

END OF SECTION 000100



Supplementary Instruction to Bidders 002200 - 1

SECTION 002200 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

QUALIFICATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall be licensed in the State of Maryland as a General Contractor to perform work

associated with this project.

B. The Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience performing Construction work of

similar nature.

C. Upon request, the Contractor shall supply the Procurement Officer a list of similar Projects, which have

been successfully completed by the Contractor.




Summary of Work 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Project consists of adding air conditioning to the fitness center building at the Camp

Fretterd Readiness Center, 5404 Rue Saint Drive, Reisterstown, Maryland 21136.

1. Project Location: Replace Fitness Center A/C Camp Fretterd Readiness Center, 5404 Rue

Saint Drive, Reisterstown, Maryland 21136

2. Owner: State of Maryland.

B. Contract Documents, dated July 12, 2021 were prepared for the project by:

A Squared Plus Engineering Support Group, LLC

2601 Emory Road, Building 1, Suite B

Finksburg, Maryland 21048

Phone: 443-977-9741

Contact: Sherry Abbott-Adkins, P.E.

C. The Work consists of the following but not limited to:

1. In general, the intent of the project is to add air conditioning to the military gym, overflow

readiness area, corridor, female locker room and male locker room. Work shall consist of

but not limited to adding pad mounted air conditioning units to serve military gym and

overflow readiness area; split system air conditioning units to serve corridor, female locker

room and male locker room; upgrading the building’s main electrical service; altering the

building’s existing main electrical distribution system; adding duct type smoke detectors and

alteration/modifications to the existing fire alarm system..

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Sequence of work and power outages shall be coordinated with the DGS Area Construction

Supervisor. Seven day notice to DGS Area Construction Supervisor prior to power outages.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated on Contract Drawings.

1.5 COODINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site during entire construction period, with the

exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to

minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with

Owner’s operations.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways and adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not



Summary of Work 011000 - 2

close or obstruct walkways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission

form Owner and authorizes having jurisdiction.

2. When activities that will affect Owner, request should be made to the DGS Area

Construction Supervisor 168 hours in advance of any planned disruption. The contractor

must receive approval from the DGS Area Construction Supervisor before proceeding. All

work will be coordinated with the DGS Area Construction Supervisor to allow for

minimum disruption to occupants. The Contractor must request permission for any

disruption in services or area utilization related to this project.

1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. If any conflicts that may exist between DIVISION 0 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT,

DIVISION 1 and THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, THE DIVISION 0 CONDITIONS

OF THE CONTRACT shall prevail.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words “shall”, “shall be”, or “shall comply with”, depending on the context, are implied

where a colon; is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




Substitutions 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500-SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required

by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are

considered to be requests for substitions.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed

Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability

of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor

or Owner.

3. Compatibility: Compatibility shall be determined by Engineer and Owner at the time of the

substitution request. Products shall not be considered compatible if the products require the

Owner to purchase or maintain attic stock, maintenance stock or replacement parts of two

different products that perform the same function.

4. Voluntary Alternates: Substitutions for convenience that are made by the Contractor

during bidding.

5. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:

a. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and referred to as voluntary

alternates and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in

the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section

of substitutions.

b. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Engineer.

c. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract

Documents.

d. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and

orders issued by governing authorities.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received

PRIOR to commencement of the Work. Requests received after commencement of the Work

will not be considered or rejected.




1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the

form and according to procedures required for change-order proposals.

2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request.

Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for

substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or installation cannot be provided, if

applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate

Contractors that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance,

weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and

specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work

specified.

d. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction

Schedule compared to the schedule without acceptance of the substitution. Indicate the

effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

g. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirement indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building codes in effect for project.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor’s construction schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If

specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer’s letterhead, stating date of

receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.

l. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements

in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications

indicated.

m. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately or

produce indicated results.

4. Engineer Action: If necessary, the Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The

Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2

weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or

documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Supplemental

Instructions for minor changes in the work.

b. Use the product specified if the Engineer cannot make a decision on the use of a

proposed substitute within the time allocated.




1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the accepted

substitutions.

B. Project Delays: No delay claim can be made based solely on a substitution request.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not late than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related

submittals.

1. Conditions: The Engineer will consider the Contractor's request for substitution when

all of the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,

the Engineer will return the requests without action, except to record noncompliance

with these requirements.

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor’s construction schedule.

d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION AND REDESIGN OF WORK

A. Contractor shall be fully responsible to coordinate and redesign of areas of the Work as required

to incorporate the accepted substitution.

B. Contractor certifies that substitute materials:

1. Have been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to the

specified product.




2. Provide the same warranty for substituted product as for specified product.

3. Cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract.

4. Will not affect dimensions, functional clearances, utility requirements, system operations and

performance, and will be fully coordinated and complete in all respects.




Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

Contract modifications.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012500 “Substitution” for administrative procedures for handling requests for

substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK AND CLARIFICATIONS

A. Engineer may issue supplemental instructions authorizing Changes in the Work not involving

adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Engineer will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are not instructions either to stop

work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 14 consecutive days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation

estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to

execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey

data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of

trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor’s construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting

an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Engineer.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Engineer.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description or the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.



Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - 2

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to

substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor’s construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the

Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 “Substitution” if the proposed change

requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Engineer.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner’s approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Engineer will issue a Change Order

for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Engineer may issue a Construction Change Directive.

Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for

subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.






Payment Procedures 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process

Applications for Payment

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 012600 “Contract Modification Procedures” for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract

Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s

Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor’s

construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative

forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor’s


2. Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later than the

pre-construction meeting. Application for Payment cannot be prepared without an

approved schedule of values.

3. Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor’s construction

schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide sub-schedules showing values

coordinated with each element.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for

the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Owner

reserves the right to require line items of the schedule of values be broken down further as may

be required to satisfy the Owner.




1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Engineer.

c. DGS Project number.

d. Contractor’s name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,

include evidence of insurance.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for

each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the

Work.

6. Each items in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of

values or distributed as general overhead expense at Contractor’s option.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives

result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent

with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Engineer by the 15th of the

month, if dates for each progress is not indicated in the Agreement between Owner and

Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the

last day of the month unless period of construction work is indicated in Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review

by Engineer.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form

for Applications for Payment.




D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor’s construction

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,

whether or not payment had been received. Include only amounts for work completed

at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before

last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or

equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items

stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of

surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid

invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not

include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored material indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous

Application for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application

of Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and

remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

4. Materials may only be stored in a bonded warehouse for off-site storage.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment

to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of

lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording

appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic’s Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of

mechanic’s lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic’s lien arising out of the

Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after

deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full

waivers.




3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

H. Project Schedule

1. A current project schedule shall be provided with each Application for Payment.

2. Submitted schedule shall indicate the Project being completed by the Contractual

Completion Dates.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of values.

3. Contractor’s construction schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Products list (preliminary if not final)

5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).

6. List of Contractor’s staff assignments.

7. List of Contractor’s principal consultants

8. Copies of building permits

9. Copies of authorizations and licenses for authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work

10. Initial progress report

11. Report of preconstruction conference

12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

13. Performance and payment bonds.

14. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion

for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.




2. This application shall reflect Certificate of Substantial Completions issued previously

for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final

Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted

and accepted, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims.”

5. AIA Document G706A, “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens.”

6. AIA Document G707, “Consent of Surety to Final Payment.”

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as

of dated of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.






Administration of Contract 013000 - 1

SECTION 013000-ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Contractor shall follow the drawings strictly and execute all work in accordance therewith,

and with the kind and quality of materials set forth in the specifications, using the figured

dimensions marked in the drawings and not scaled measurements. Contractor is responsible for

verifying all dimensions.

B. The specifications and drawings shall be considered complementary to each other so that any

work shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, and vice-versa, shall be

executed in the same manner as though mentioned in the specifications and shown in the

drawings.

C. The Contractor shall furnish and install such work as may be proper and provide suitable

preparation, basis, support, or finish for the work which is shown or specified, whether or not

the same is specifically mentioned in the specifications or shown on the drawings. The

Contractor shall be required to make plural and complete work which is shown single or

partially indicated to avoid needless repetition, for the sake of brevity, and for reasons of clarity.

In all cases, the intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications, as defined herein, shall

be followed. The Contractor shall not avail himself of any errors or omissions therein, should

any exist, which may be in conflict therewith.

1.2 PERMITS AND APPROVALS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain and pay for all inspections and any permits

necessary for the entire project.




Project Management and Coordination 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and other Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating

construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Request for Information (RFIs).

4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor (General Contractor and Sub-contractor) shall participate in coordination

requirements. The Contract documents do not specify that certain areas of responsibility are

assigned to a specific contractor, therefore it is the General Contractor’s responsibility to include

all sub-contractors within the coordination process.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Engineer, or Contractor seeking information required by or

clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignment, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.

Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,

including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide manes,

addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of

individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary

telephone. Keep list current at all times.




1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory

personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1.6 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURE

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these

Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or

after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required

maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, repair of all

components.

5. Coordinate work to be performed by the Owner’s own work force, where applicable.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for

coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work

is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures

with other construction activities and activities of the other contractors to avoid conflicts and to

ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to,

the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Project closeout activities

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.




1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in,

the Work.

2. Any equipment/material not wanted by the facility is the responsibility of the contractor to

remove and dispose of in an environmental acceptable manner.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required

to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and

resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare

sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems

and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by

multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the

information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before

submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of, but not limited to:

architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement

of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,

valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.

g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear

to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements.

Provide alternate sketches to Engineer indicating proposed resolution of such

conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered

changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor’s

responsibility. If Engineer determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in

sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Engineer will so inform Contractor,

who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

2. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to

requirements in Section 013300.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following

requirements:




1. File Preparation Format: DWG

2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File

(PDF) format.

1.8 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to make a reasonable and detailed review of the

Contract Documents prior to the issuance of an RFI to the Engineer to determine that

requested information is not readily inferable from the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by Contractor

with no response.

3. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor’s work

or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Engineer.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. RFI subject.

7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

10. Contractor’s suggested resolution. If Contractor’s suggested resolution impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

11. Contractor’s signature.

12. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items

needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow

seven working (business) days for Engineer’sresponse for each RFI. RFI’s received by Engineer

after 12:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for approval of Contractor’s means and methods.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the contract Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Engineer’s actions on submittals.




g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Engineer’s action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engineer’s

time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Engineer’s action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract

Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600

“Contract Modification Procedures.”

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum, notify Engineer in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI

response.

D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Engineer.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Engineer’s response was received.

E. On receipt of Engineer’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to

affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Contractor disagrees

with response.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Engineer of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including

Owner and Engineer, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution

of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor

and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall

attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and

authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.




c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFIs.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

j. Submittal procedures.

k. Preparation of record documents.

l. Use of the premises and existing building.

m. Work restrictions.

n. Working hours.

o. Owner’s occupancy requirements.

p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

q. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

r. Parking availability.

s. Office, work, and storage areas.

t. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

u. Security.

v. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: The Engineer will be responsible for recording and distributing the meeting

minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Engineer of

scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular

activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Related RFIs.

c. Related Change Orders.

d. Submittals.

e. Review of mockups.

f. Possible conflicts.

g. Compatibility requirements.

h. Time schedules.

i. Weather limitations.

j. Manufacturer’s written instructions.

k. Warranty requirements.

l. Compatibility of materials.

m. Acceptability of substrates.

n. Coordination with other work.

o. Protection of adjacent work.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.




4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate

whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and

reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

6. Minutes: The General Contractor shall record and distribute the meeting minutes.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time

convenient to Owner and Engineer, but no later than 60 days prior to the scheduled date of

Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Engineer, and their consultants; Contractor

and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall

attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including

the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

f. Requirements for demonstration and training.

g. Preparation of Contractor’s punch list.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.

i. Owner’s partial occupancy requirements.

j. Installation of Owner’s furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

4. Minutes: The Engineer will record and distribute the meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. The Owner reserves the right

to change the frequency of the progress meetings.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to

conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other

items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate

to status of Project.




a. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in

relation to Contractor’s construction schedule. Determine how construction behind

schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so.

Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent

activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Progress cleaning.

5) Status of correction of deficient items.

6) Field observations.

7) Status of RFIs.

8) Status of proposal requests.

9) Pending changes.

10) Status of Change Orders.

11) Pending claims and disputes.

12) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: The Engineer shall record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present

and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: General Contractor shall revise Contractor’s construction

schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made

or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the

substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of

uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and

installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or

deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the

remainder of the construction period. Adjust operable components to assure operability without

damaging effects.




C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.

2. Excessive internal or external pressures.

3. Excessively high or low temperatures.

4. Thermal shock.

5. Excessively high or low humidity.

6. Air contamination or pollution.

7. Water or ice.

8. Solvents.

9. Chemicals.

10. Light.

11. Radiation.

12. Puncture.

13. Abrasion.

14. Heavy traffic.

15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.

16. Bacteria.

17. Rodent and insect infestation.

18. Combustion.

19. Electrical current.

20. High-speed operation.

21. Improper lubrication.

22. Unusual wear or other misuse.

23. Contact between incompatible materials.

24. Destructive testing.

25. Misalignment.

26. Excessive weathering.

27. Unprotected storage.

28. Improper shipping or handling.

29. Theft.

30. Vandalism.

3.3 WORK HOURS AND COMPLETION TIME

A. The Contractor shall have all project work completed and ready for complete acceptance by Owner

within 180 days of notice to proceed.

B. Hours of Operation: Unless otherwise coordinated and approved, all work specified within this

Contract shall be performed during normal working hours of 8:00am and 5:00pm, Monday

through Friday. Confirmation of normal working hours with facility must be done prior to starting

work. All work with be coordinated with the DGS Area Construction Supervisor to allow for

minimum disruption to occupants. The Contractor must request permission for any disruption in

services or area utilization related to this project. This request should be made to the DGS Area

Construction Supervisor 168 hours in advance of any planned disruption. The contractor must

receive approval from the DGS Area Construction Supervisor before proceeding.



A Squared Plus Engineering Support Group, LLC DGS M-139-170-003 CAD File Transfer 013111 - 1

SECTION 01 31 11

An Agreement Between Engineer and Contractor for Transfer of

Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) Files on Electronic Media

Engineer A Squared Plus Engineering Contractor

Support Group, LLC

Project Name: Replace Fitness Center A/C

Camp Fretterd Readiness Center, 5404 Rue Saint Drive,

Reisterstown, Maryland 21136

Date

The Engineer will provide only plan CAD files for the convenience of the General Contractor in preparing shop fabrication drawings:

Contractor shall pay Engineer a service fee of five hundred U.S. Dollars ($ 500.00) per sheet.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS:

1. Engineer makes no representation as to the compatibility of the CAD files with any hardware or

software.

2. Since the information set forth on the CAD files can be modified unintentionally or otherwise, the

Engineer reserves the right to remove all indicia of its ownership and/or involvement from each

electronic display.

3. All information on the CAD files is considered instruments of service of the Engineer and shall

not be used for other projects, for additions to this project, or completion of this project by others.

CAD files shall remain the property of the Engineer, and in no case shall the transfer of these files be

considered a sale.

4. Engineer makes no representation regarding the accuracy, completeness, or permanence of CAD

files, or for their merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Addenda information or

revisions made after the date indicated on the CAD files may not have been incorporated. In the

event of a conflict between the Engineer’s sealed contract drawings and CAD files, the sealed

contract drawings shall govern. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine if any conflicts

exist. The CAD files shall not be considered to be Contract Documents as defined by the

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

5. The use of CAD files prepared by the Engineer shall not in any way obviate the Contractor’s

responsibility of the proper checking and coordination of dimensions, details, member sizes and gage,

and quantities of materials as required to facilitate complete and accurate fabrication and erection.

6. The Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify, defend and hold harmless the

Engineer, and its subconsultants from all claims, damages, losses, expenses, penalties and liabilities of

any kind, including attorney’s fees, arising out of or resulting from the use of the CAD files

by the Contractor, or by third party recipients of the CAD files from the Contractor.


A Squared Plus Engineering Support Group, LLC DGS M-139-170-003 CAD File Transfer 013111 - 2

7. The Engineer believes that no licensing or copyright fees are due to others on account of the transfer of the CAD files, but to the extent any are, the Contractor will pay the appropriate fees and

hold the Architect harmless from such claims.

8. Any purchase order number provided by the Contractor is for Contractor’s accounting purposes only.

Purchase order terms and conditions are void and are not a part of this agreement.

9. Payment of the service fee is due prior to receipt of the CAD files.

10. This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the principal place of business of the Engineer.

AUTHORIZED ACCEPTANCE

Engineer

Signature

Print Name and Title

Date

Contractor

Signature

Print Name and Title

Date

July 12, 2021 Fitness Center A/C Camp Fretterd Readiness Center


Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor’s construction schedule and reports.

2. Daily construction reports.

3. Material location reports.

4. Site condition reports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring and

controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time

and resources.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise

approved by Engineer/Architect and/or DGS site representative.

C. Contractor’s Construction Schedule

1. Gantt Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor’s construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since

the start of Project.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file unless otherwise directed by DGS site representative

B. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for

entire construction period.

C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

E. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.




F. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor’s construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in

proper sequence.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final

completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early

completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as

flows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction

b. Limitations of continued occupancies

c. Use of premises restrictions.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Submittals

b. Purchases

c. Deliveries

d. Installation

e. Tests and inspections

f. Adjusting

g. Curing

h. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

4. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the

Work. Indicate where each construction activity within major area must be sequenced or

integrated with other construction activities to provide the following:

a. Completion of installation per discipline.

b. Substantial Completion.

C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to

Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the flowing issues.

1. Unresolved issues.




2. Unanswered Requests for Information.

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.

4. Notations on returned submittals.

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

2.2 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information

concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Unusual events (see special reports).

9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

10. Meter readings and similar recordings

11. Emergency procedures

12. Change Orders received and implemented.

13. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.

14. Services connected and disconnected.

15. Equipment or system tests and startups.

16. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction

17. List of work performed.

E. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials

delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported

plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for

materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following

categories for stored materials.

F. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the

Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information.




Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing

the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor’s Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual

construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress

meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been

recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Engineer, Owner, separate

contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-

know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the

Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.




Photographic Documentation 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233-PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

other Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. General: This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.

2. Periodic construction photographs.

3. Final completion construction photographs.

1.3 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner and Engineer for unlimited

reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with a minimum sensor

size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly

show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without

alteration, manipulation, editing or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,

available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to

Architect/Engineer.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of the Project site and

surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage

points.



Photographic Documentation 013233 - 2

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.

2. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.

3. Take photographs of existing building either on or adjoining property to accurately record

physical conditions at start of construction.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs daily representing the current activities. Select

vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take photographs from single location, to show

status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

1. Frequency: Take photographs daily with the cutoff date associated with each Application for

Payment.

2. Vantage Points: During each of the following construction phases, take not less than two of

the required shots from same vantage point each time to create a time-lapse sequence as

follows:

a. Commencement of the Work

b. Substantial Completion

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial

Completion for submission as project record documents.

1. Do not include date stamp.




Submittal Procedures 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 – SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirement for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer’s

responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification

Sections as “action submittals.”

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require

Engineer’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as

“informational submittals.”

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for

representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout

document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making

corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and

reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor’s construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals

required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain

orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for

manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor’s


4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Scheduled date of Engineer’s final release or approval.

f. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

g. Activity or event number.




1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Engineer’s Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be

provided by Engineer for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction

activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and

related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial

submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section

as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing

will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with

other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time

for review shall commence on Engineer receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will

be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit

processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 20 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a

submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial

submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Engineer consultants, Owner, or

other parties is indicated, allow 25 working days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Engineer will review an Initial Submittal or Intermediate Submittal and (1) Submittal Revision.

Any additional reviews shall be billed to the General Contractor on an hourly basis at the

Engineer’s Current Billing Rates and will not be returned to the General Contractor until payment

has been received. This shall not be cause for any delay claims or additional compensation claims

by the General Contractor to the Owner.

D. Electronic Submittals Unless Directed by DGS field Representative: Identify and incorporate

information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation

to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a

sequential number followed by a dash and a SHORT description of the submittal contents

(e.g., 079200.01 – Joint Sealant Product Data). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic

suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 079200.01.A – Joint Sealant Product Data

Resubmittal)

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor’s review and approval markings

and action taken by Engineer.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project

management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.




c. Name and address of Engineer.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location (s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor’s

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by

Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,

including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related

submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmittal submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer action stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,

installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction

activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual

Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Email electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Engineer email address specifically

established for Project unless otherwise noted.

a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic

Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity

responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer

or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and

certifications where indicated.




B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of

product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not

suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer’s product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop

Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following

information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings

on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and

actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one

submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal

of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification

information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to




determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification

Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner’s property, are the

property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or sections

of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set (s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture,

or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s product line.

Engineer will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same

material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical

with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations

expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured

or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively

used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components

used for independent testing and inspection.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following

information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents

or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm

or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of

engineers and owners, and other information specified.

G. Installer Certificated: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that Installer

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by

manufacturer for this specific Project.

H. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

I. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that product

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that material

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in


L. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed

by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified testing agency.




M. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the

following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturer’s names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for

compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of

product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

P. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed

either during installation or product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance

with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list

of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load

diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include

page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other

Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field

dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and

location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of

Contractor’s approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and

approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will

mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if

it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals

has received prior approval from Engineer.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for




resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Engineer without action.




Reference Standards and Definitions 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200-REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. “Engineer" and its duly authorized agents:

A Squared Engineering Support Group, LLC

2601 Emory Road, Building 1, Suite B, Finksburg, Maryland 21048

C. "Owner": State of Maryland, and its duly authorized agents.

D. "Contractor": Where used in any of the contract documents, this term refers to the firm whose

officers have signed and sealed the Form of Proposal.

E. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the

Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the

Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help

the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.

F. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required,"

and "permitted" mean directed by the Engineer, requested by the Engineer, and similar phrases.

G. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued

by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the

construction industry that control performance of the Work.

H. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,

unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

I. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,

temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to

dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

J. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

K. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an

employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction activity

including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be

experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

L. Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be

performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as




"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of

the corresponding generic name.

M. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either

exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The limit of the

Project site shall be determined on the project site and coordinated with the Owner and Engineer.

N. "Substantial Completion": This term means, in the opinion of the Engineer, that the work is 100%

completed with the exception of a few minor items delayed for reasons beyond the Contractor's

control. However, items late in completion because of the Contractor's negligence or lack of

foresight will not be deemed valid exceptions.

O. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific

inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to

interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the

Construction Specifications Institute's division format and numbering system.

B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These

conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is

abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not

stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural

and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract

Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At

certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities

that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,

applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied

directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the

Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,

comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different

but apparently equal to the Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be




the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Engineer for a

decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor

shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request.

E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently

abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating

organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text

provision. Abbreviations and names are indicated below. Refer to Gale Research Inc.'s

"Encyclopedia of Associations," which is available in most libraries, for further information about

trade associations

AIA The American Institute of Engineers

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council

ASHE American Society for Healthcare

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions

CDA Copper Development Association Inc.

EIA Electronic Industries Assoc.

ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.

FM Factory Mutual

IBC International Building Code

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IMC International Mechanical Code

IRI Industrial Risk Insurers

ISA Instrument Society of America

NEC National Electrical Code (Available from NFPA)

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc.

NETA International Electrical Testing Assoc.

NFPA National Fire Protection Assoc.

NPCA National Paint and Coatings Assoc.

UL Underwriters Laboratories

1.5 GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES

A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of all applicable regulations and retain at the Project site to be

available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,




certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance

with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.






Quality Requirements 014500 - 1

SECTION 014500-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are

specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may

also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-assurance

and

-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by

Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this

Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to

verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups

establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify

performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the

building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products

and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified

criteria.




D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of

the Work and for completed Work.

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,

Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including

installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain

construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that

requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, “experienced” means having successfully

complete a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before

proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,

indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.





A. Contactor’s Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor’s quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative’s Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer’s technical representative’s test and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirement.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements

and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.




C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative’s Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer’s factory—authorized service representative’s tests and inspections specified in

other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making

report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgements, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performances of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as

sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for

this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services

of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the

system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, and NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to

ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NTRL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST’s National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of

manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of




manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for

compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform

same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods

of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not

reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,

and similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and

inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or

deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.

2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that

will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop

Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups

are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

L. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in

individual Specification Sections.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are

Contractor’s responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the

Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by

authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by




authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. Contractor shall have prior

experience within jurisdiction Work is to be performed and shall therefore have knowledge of

jurisdictions quality control services required. Quality control services required by the AHJ

shall be included within contract and shall not be considered for additional services or

Chance to the Contract.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency

to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing

or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, submit a certified

written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing an inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents

are Contractor’s responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 “Submittal

Procedures.”

C. Manufacturer’s Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer’s technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer’s technical representative’s

services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor’s

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities of deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are

conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test inspection, and similar quality-

control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or

accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.




F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar

quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency

sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.

Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and –

control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with

Contractor’s construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and

inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and

inspection log for Engineer’s reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification

Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend




restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply

with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00

“Execution.”

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.




Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000-CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Engineer, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner’s existing system is

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary

utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. DGS inspector shall use contractor field office.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building.



Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 015000 - 2

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are

no longer needed.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction

area that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Engineer schedules Substantial Completion inspection.

Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to user permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, or no later than Substantial Completion.




Vehicular Access and Parking 015500 - 1

SECTION 015500 –VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Driveways, entrance, and traffic routes.

B. Parking.

C. Existing pavements and parking areas.

D. Construction parking controls.

E. Traffic signs and signal.

F. Maintenance.

G. Removal, repair.

H. Mud from site vehicles.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DRIVEWAYS, ENTRANCE AND TRAFFIC ROUTES

A. Keep driveways and entrances serving premises and site surrounding Project clear and available to

Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking

or storage of materials. Provide continuous monitoring of site.

1. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on-site.

B. Truck deliveries shall be scheduled so that the streets adjacent to the site do not back up with delivery

trucks waiting to deliver materials. Trucks must be scheduled accordingly, or wait to unload inside the

fence in the project site or off the Owner’s property.

3.2 PARKING

A. Use of existing parking facilities by construction personnel is not permitted.

B. Use of new parking facilities by construction personnel is not permitted.

C. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas.

D. Arrange for temporary parking areas to accommodate use of construction personnel.

E. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.

F. Locate as approved by Engineer.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL



Vehicular Access and Parking 015500 - 2

A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access by emergency

vehicles, and Owner’s operations.

B. Monitor parking of construction personnel’s vehicles. Maintain vehicular access to and through

parking areas.

C. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas.

3.4 HAUL ROUTES

A. Consult with authority having jurisdiction, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes

and site access.

B. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes.

C. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference with

public traffic.

3.5 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS

A. At approaches to site and on site, install at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as

needed to direct construction and affected public traffic.

B. Install and operate traffic control signals to direct and maintain orderly flow of traffic in areas under

Contractor’s control, and areas affected by Contractor’s operations.

C. Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of excavated material, construction

equipment, Products, mud, snow, and ice.

B. Maintain existing paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas,

standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified,

condition.

3.7 REMOVAL, REPAIR

A. Repair existing and new permanent facilities damaged by use, to original condition.

B. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required.

C. Repair damage caused by installation.

3.8 MUD FROM SITE VEHICLES

A. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.




Indoor Air Quality Controls 015721 - 1

SECTION 015721 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

PART 1-GENERAL


A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction.

1.2 PROJECT GOALS

A. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC

ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract.

2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and

equipment from construction dust.

3. Establish condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to start of alterations.

B. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air

pollutants.

1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.

2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products

leading to indoor air pollution.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

B. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile,

fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products.

B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as

specified.

C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.

D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile

organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote

adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied

Buildings Under Construction as a guide.

1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building.

2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust.

4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas.




5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control.

6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of

ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement

of filters. 7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures.

C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors,

moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times.

D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report.

PART 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC

content.

B. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV of 8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2.

PART 3-EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by:

1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until

wet work is completed and dry.

2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging.

3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame.

B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed.

C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems.

D. When working in a portion of an occupied building, prevent movement of air from construction

area to occupied area.

E. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms.

F. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris

generated by construction activities.

1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes

and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames.

4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit,

equipment, and supports.

5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.

6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete.




G. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters.

H. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings

Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures.




Project Identification and Signs 015800 - 1

SECTION 015800-PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

PART 1-GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish, erect, and maintain such signs as may be required or necessary to safeguard life

and property.

B. Provide directional signs for delivery of materials to site.

C. Signage or advertisements other than the State-approved sign are not permitted without the

written permission of the Owner.

D. Remove all temporary signage at the conclusion of the project and restore to pre-existing

conditions.

E. Provide and install project identification sign as per DGS requirements.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Project identification sign shall be painted by a professional sign painter.

B. Samples of colors shall be submitted for approval.

PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3-EXECUTION (Not used)




Product Requirements 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor’s

selection of products for use in the Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers’

standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section “Reference Standards and Definitions” specifies the applicability of

industry standards to products specified.

2. Division 1 Section “Substitutions” specifies administrative procedures for handling requests

for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the

Contract Documents, such as “specialties,” “systems,” “structure,” “finishes,” “accessories,” and

similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the

construction industry.

B. “Products” are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,”

“equipment,” “system,” and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer’s product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer’s published product

literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process

to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,

physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of

specified product. The Engineer and Owner will have final approval whether or not

products are comparable. Products will not be considered comparable when the Owner will

be required to maintain an attic stock or maintenance stock of two

similar/equal/comparable products that perform that same function but are not compatible

or do not physically relate to one another. Example: The existing electrical system utilizes

manufacturer A’s breakers and panels but manufacturer B is submitted for all new breakers

and panels thus requiring the Owner to maintain a maintenance stock of two different

breakers. In this case manufacturer B is not comparable.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer’s

product is named and accompanied by the words “basis-of-design product,” including make or




model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,

function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other

characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers

named in specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section

number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in “Comparable Products”

Article.

2. Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.

Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product

request within 20 business days of receipt of request, or seven business days of receipt of

additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures.”

b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product

request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300

“Submittal Procedures.” Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products

for use on Project, select product compatible with products existing or previously selected, even if

previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible

with products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of

other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,

Engineer will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer’s written

instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding

of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are

flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer’s original sealed

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling,

storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to




determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific

rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,

ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer’s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly

executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written

document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting

special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for

a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in

similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term “as selected,” Engineer will make selection.




5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term “or equal,” or “or

approved equal,” or “or approved,” comply with requirements in “Comparable Products”

Article obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named

product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for

Contractor’s convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a

product by the named manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or

source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor’s

convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and

products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable

products or substitutions for Contractor’s convenience will not be considered unless

otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that

complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in “Comparable Products” Article

for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers’ names, provide a

product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable

products or substitutions for Contractor’s convenience will not be considered.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide

a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer,

that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in “Comparable Products”

Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer’s product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated

on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or

a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications

indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product

named. Comply with requirements in “Comparable Products” Article for consideration of an

unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require “match Engineer’s sample”, provide a

product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer’s sample. Engineer’s decision will

be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified

requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures” for

proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase “as selected by Engineer

from manufacturer’s full range” or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements.

Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer’s product line that

includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS




A. Conditions for Consideration: Engineer will consider Contractor’s request for comparable product

when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer

may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that

it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it

is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of engineers and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)




Execution 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300-EXECUTION

PART 1 – GENERAL



and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the

Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Installation of the Work.

3. Cutting and patching.

4. Progress cleaning.

5. Starting and adjusting.

6. Protection of installed construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other

work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after

installation of other work.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of

construction elements.

1. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

2. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety.

3. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and

patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties/trades

involved in cutting and patching. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate

procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instruction: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer’s written

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces,

use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to Engineer for the visual and functional perform of in-place

materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction

indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the

existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other

construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities

serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,

examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and

fixture installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with

the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located

in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirement: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on

Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for




clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of

Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in Section

013100 “Project Management and Coordination.”

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings,

in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify

Engineer promptly.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and

topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and

ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain

conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items

on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involve templates for work specified to be factory

prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate

provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and

number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other

portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type

required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights

directed by Engineer.

2. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered




hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed

with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original

condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation of cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to

void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during

cutting and patching operations.

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with

original Installer’s written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering

and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum

disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-

core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug

and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other

foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable.

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where

applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate

physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and

refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.




G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar,

oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements

strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg. F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are

working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper

execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions

of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically

recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are

not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down

sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419

“Construction Waste Management and Disposal.”

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials

already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or

deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the

remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability

without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING




A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning

units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without

binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 “Quality

Requirements.”

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instruction for temperature and relative humidity.




Construction Waste Management and Disposal 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419-CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from

construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective

demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,

reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for

reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another

facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into

the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates of salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-

hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of

materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition

waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.


A. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-

Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

B. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by

recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,




and invoices.

C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and

incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this

Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue

analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or

volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage,

transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire

duration of the Contract.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as

appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan

procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum

interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements,

date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.

3. Store items in a secure area until installation.

4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment.

Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional

for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner’s Use: Salvage items for Owner’s use and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements,




date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste

materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to


1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate

on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.




Closeout Procedures 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including,

but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Correction/repair of the Work

6. Additional closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the

appropriate Sections.


A. Contractor’s List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion,

complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial

Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as

substantially complete.

a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents

and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of

incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.

5. Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

6. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance

personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, construction tools, and

similar elements.

7. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.




8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Engineer will either proceed with

inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Engineer will prepare the

Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection and advise the Contractor of minor

construction that must be completed prior to substantial completion.

1. The Engineer will prepare and transmit to the Contractor a punch list of items to be corrected.

2. The Engineer will repeat inspection upon receipt of a punch list certified complete by the

Contractor.

3. Results of the repeat inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance and

completion. If the Engineer is requested to make additional site visits after the repeat inspection,

the cost of such visits shall be chargeable at the Engineer’s billing rate and the Owner shall deduct

the cost of such visits from any monies otherwise due the Contractor.

C. Contractor’s List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and

corrected (Contractor’s punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the

Work is incomplete. Indicate time required to complete. All items must be able to be completed

within thirty (30) days.

1. Contractor’s punch list will be reviewed at the Substantial Completion Walk-through.

2. Engineer reserve the right to add items to the punch list.

3. Engineer may end walk-through and delay Substantial Completion if the punch list is incomplete.

D. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to

requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are

incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting

Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include but not limited to

operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record

documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic

documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record

information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare

parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Engineer. Label with

manufacturer’s name and model number where applicable.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

7. Submit letter on Contractor’s letterhead stating that no products or materials with asbestos were

used in this project.

E. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to

requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are

incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner’s

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.




5. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment

and systems.

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting walk-through with local emergency responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Tough up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

F. Walk-Through: Submit a written request for walk-through to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of thirty (30) days prior to date the work will be competed and ready for final review and

tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after walk-

through or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor’s list or additional items identified by

Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re- Walk-Through: Request walk-through when the Work identified in previous walk-through as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed walk-through will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE & COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance,

completion and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Submit the final payment according to Section 012900 “Payment Procedures”.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

No additional charges unless approved previously through the change order procedure.

3. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit a certified copy of the Engineer's final walk-through

list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by the Engineer.

Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for

acceptance.

4. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with

insurance requirements.

5. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and

systems.

B. Walk-through: Submit a written request for final walk-through to determine acceptance. On receipt of

request, Engineer will either proceed with walk-through or notify Contractor of unfulfilled

requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after walk-through or will notify

Contractor of items, either on Contractor’s list or additional items identified by the Engineer, that

must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

C. Re- Walk-Through Procedure: The Engineer will re- walk-through the Work identified in previous

walk-through as incomplete, is complete or corrected. Additional walk-throughs may be subject to

Engineer’s fees.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction

operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by

Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.




1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest

floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual

walls, floors, equipment and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Engineer and Construction Manager.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of the Work

where commencement or warranties other that date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay

in submittal of warranties might limit Owner’s rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of Substantial completion of

designated portions of the work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction

period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as

necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to

identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,

including the name of the product and name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title “WARRANTIES,” Project

name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond

submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each

item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND SPARE PARTS

A. Provide products, spare parts, tools and maintenance materials to the State in quantities specified in

individual specification sections.

B. Separately pack the items for each system or finish, clearly identifying the trade name and stock

number, where item is to be used, and name, address and phone number of the closest supplier.

C. Deliver the items to the project site prior to the final inspection, unless otherwise directed by DGS

representative. Coordinate storage location(s) with the DGS representative, provide bill of materials

and obtain receipt from DGS representative prior to final payment.

D. Cleaning agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the

surface to be cleaned. Do not us cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or

that might damage finished surfaces.




1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37 or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that

comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. See section 017823.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning

is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance

program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting final inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.

b. Wipe surfaces of equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances

c. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign

substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits.

Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that

display contamination with particulate matter upon walk-through.

(a) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report

upon completion of cleaning.

f. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the

Work during construction.

D. Use cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer’s of surfaces to be cleaned.

E. Maintain project in final cleaned condition until occupancy by the Using Agency/State.

F. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419

“Construction Waste Management and Disposal.”

G. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for

cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's

property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove

waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the

Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of





B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,

refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating

equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.

Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace

finishes and surfaces that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over “UL” and other required labels and identification, including mechanical

and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

2. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or

reduce longevity.




Operation and Maintenance Data 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance

manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification

Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted

and organized as required by this Section.

1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and

field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit

on digital media acceptable to Engineer.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item

name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies to Engineer when requested. Include a complete operation and maintenance

directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Engineer will return three

copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of manual

are acceptable.




D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer

will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer’s comments. Submit copies of each

corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer’s comments and prior to commencing

demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data

and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of System and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and

maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of

equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify

each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract

Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4,

“Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.”

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.

6. Name and contact information for Engineer/Architect.

7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the systems

contained in the manuals.

8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the

content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requirements more than one volume to




accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of

the set.

C. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,

subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

D. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF

file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names.

Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in

manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into

individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting

bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree.

Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

E. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, post-type binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine

to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organized data

in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference

other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or

maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and

indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for

multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.

Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components

of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as

foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,

insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and

drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.




3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instruction and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Power failure.

4. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

5. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warning, trouble indications, error messages, and

similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner’s operating personnel for notification of

Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment

indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Precautions against improper use.

8. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.

2. Manufacturer’s name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Engineering data and tests.

8. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:




1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routing and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and

warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged

to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of

Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number

and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer’s name.

3. Material and chemical composition.

4. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related

services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source

information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance

service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.




B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each

product, list name address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance

service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual

and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation including

the following information for each component part of piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instruction.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training video recording.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required

lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service

with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources of

maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone

number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides and

organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by

emergency personnel and by Owner’s operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.




D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data

indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a

system.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of

component parts of equipment and systems. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in

record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.




Project Record Documents 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including

the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of prints.

2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project’s Specifications, including

addenda and contact modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit

duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping

requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF

electronic files and directories of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



Project Record Documents 017839 – 2

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop

Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from

that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether

individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for

preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to

identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

d. Revisions to routing of utilities and conduits.

e. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

f. Actual equipment locations.

g. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

h. Changes made following Engineer/Architect’s written orders.

i. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

j. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

k. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel

proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between

changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from

original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,

and similar identification, where applicable.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICAITONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies

from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be

readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.



Project Record Documents 017839 – 3

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of

Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies

substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be

readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer’s written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of

Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title,

electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record

keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous

records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up

miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number

and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record

document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait

until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract

Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes.

Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from

deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Engineer/Architect’s reference

during normal working hours.




Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 017843 - 1

SECTION 017843-SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

PART 1-GENERAL


A. Products required.

B. Storage and delivery of products.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 General Requirements, apply to

this Section.

1.3 PRODUCTS REQUIRED

A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance

materials specified in other Sections to be furnished by Owner, in addition to

requirements for completion of work.

B. In the event that the specification section for any of the listed items has a different spare

parts requirement, that specification section governs.

C. Products:

1. Identical to those installed in the Work.

2. Include quantities in original purchase from supplier to avoid variations in

manufacture.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store working stock with products to be installed in the Work.

B. Following delivery of products to site, maintain spare products in same space and

condition as products to be installed in the Work.

1.5 DELIVERY

A. Coordinate with Owner:

1. Provide Owner and Engineer a copy of an itemized list of all specified working

stock, spare parts, and components 15 days prior to Substantial Completion for

review and approval. 2. Deliver all specified spare parts and items to the Owner on one single day.

3. Delivery shall occur 15 days after Substantial Completion.



Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 017843 - 2

4. Deliver to Owner itemized products and unload spare parts at location

designated by Owner.

5. Inventory and obtain signed receipt from Owner at time of delivery.

6. Missing items shall be identified in the inventory and provided with new items

within 10 days of receipt of original delivery. 7. Damaged items shall be identified in the inventory and replaced with new items

within 10 days of receipt of original delivery.

8. Repeat inventory process and obtain signed receipt from Owner at time of

delivery of missing or replacement items.

9. Identify itemized products in monthly Application for Payment and attach copy

of inventoried products and signed receipt.

10. Attach copy of Owner signed and accepted spare parts inventory list to Notice

of Substantial Completion letter.

PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3-EXECUTION (Not used)




Demonstration and Training 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1-GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:

1. All software-operated systems.

2. HVAC systems and equipment.

3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Items specified in individual product Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit three copies of outline of instructional program for

demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of

instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning

objective and outline for each training module.

1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual for Owner's use.

B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.

C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and

documentation of performance-based test.

D. Demonstration and Training Digital Video: Submit two DVD discs within seven days of

end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following

information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name of Engineer.

c. Name of Contractor.

d. Date video was recorded.

e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass

point), and elevation or story of construction.

2. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2 by 11inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-

duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front

and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as

the corresponding videotape. Include name of Project and date of videotape on

each page.





A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that

indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a

record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.

C. Provide the most qualified instructors as trainers of these contractors and/or installers

who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. Where a single person is

not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications.

D. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review

methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited

to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational

materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to

avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather

conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation

and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and

maintenance data has been reviewed by Engineer.

PART 2-PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training

modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual

Specification Sections, and as follows but not limited to:

1. HVAC systems, including air handling equipment, outside air system, air

distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices.

2. HVAC instrumentation and controls.

3. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards

panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.

Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to




master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the

following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria

c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error

messages. b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system breaking procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:




a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reass

reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e.

PART 3- EXECUTION

Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

3.1 DEMONSTRATION – GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for

the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner

personnel training is specified.

C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.

D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-

up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and

maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.

1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration

for other season within six months.

E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance,




and repair procedures.

1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and

training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.3 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training

modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for

number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Engineer will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.

3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer and with at least fourteen days'

advance notice.

2. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each

participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

3. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition

existing before initial TRAINING USE.




Site Clearing 022300 - 1

SECTION 022300 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.

2. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.

3. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 2 Section Earthwork for excavation, backfill and compaction operations.

2. Division 26 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless

indicated to be removed and reinstalled.

B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to remain on Owner’s property, cleared materials shall become

Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Site Clearing Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of site clearing work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

Ensure Owner’s on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Temporary interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be

interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from site.

5. Locations of temporary means of egress.




B. Pre-clearing photograph or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing tree, adjoining

construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site

clearing. Submit before Work begins.

C. Record Drawings identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other

subsurface conditions.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. As/if applicable, comply with hauling and disposal regulations

of Owner.

B. Pre-clearing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures

related to clearing/selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively cleared.

2. Review and finalize site clearing schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by

site clearing operations.

4. Review procedures for noise control and dust control.

5. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other substructure structural, electrical

and mechanical conditions.

6. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Conduct site clearing work so occupied operations of facility will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far

as practical.

C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and drawings before proceeding

with site clearing.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities to remain in service and protect them against damage

during selective demolition operations.

G. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without

permission from Owner.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner.




H. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service and Private Utility Locator for area where

Project is located before site clearing.

I. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control

measures are in place.

J. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating all existing

underground utilities prior to excavation, using an independent utility locator. Any

damage done to the utilities shall be repaired immediately at Contractor’s expense. The

Contractor shall also call Miss Utility at 1-800-257-7777 to obtain utility information at

least 48 hours prior to excavation. Obtain all possible existing utility location information

from the State Representative as well. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to

provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange site clearing schedule so as not to interfere with Owner’s on-site operations and

operations of adjacent occupied buildings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in the

Division 2 Section “Earthwork”.

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Review project record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not

guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in project record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of site

clearing work required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to Engineer.

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from site clearing activities.




F. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent building and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of pedestrians around selective demolition area.

2. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling, as

necessary.

G. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required

to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, and to prevent unexpected or

uncontrolled movement.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent walkways, service drive, building entries and other building facilities during

construction. Maintain exists from existing buildings.

B. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and

damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

C. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of pedestrians around site clearing area and to and from

occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.

D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open

excavations or other hazardous remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place.

E. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.3 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain repair erosion and sedimentation control measures during

construction.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.

3.4 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems to remain and protect them against

damage during site clearing operations.

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility

services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Cut off conduit a minimum 36 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining

portion of conduit.

2. Provide redline drawings.

3. Provide record drawings identifying and accurately showing locations of utilities,

locations of capped or seal utilities and other subsurface conditions.




4.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

D. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 26 Sections covering underground

electrical work.

3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate

new construction.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF SITE CLEARED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be removed and reinstalled, or otherwise

indicated to remain Owner’s property, remove all site cleared materials from Project site and

legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.

D. Excavated Soil: Except for that to be re-used/re-installed, Contractor shall remove all excavated

soil materials from site.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by site clearing

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before site clearing operations began.




Dewatering 022400 - 1

SECTION 022400 - DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes construction dewatering.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, backfilling, site grading and for site

utilities.


A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain

dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and

to lower, control, remove and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and

construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and

constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and

permanent structures is prevented.

2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.

3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.

4. Remove dewatering system when no longer needed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

dewatering operations.

B. Record drawings at Project closeout identifying and locating capped utilities and other

subsurface conditions performed during dewatering.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning dewatering. Comply with the water disposal requirements of Maryland

Department of the Environment (MDE).





A. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating all existing

underground utilities prior to excavation, using an independent utility locator. Any damage

done to the utilities shall be repaired immediately at Contractor’s expense. The Contractor

shall also call Miss Utility at 1-800-257-7777 to obtain utility information at least 48 hours

prior to excavation. Obtain all possible existing utility location information from the State

Representative as well. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused

by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by

dewatering operations.

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from

ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area.

2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with streets, walks, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed

traffic ways if required by Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter

material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls.

B. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation,

construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient

dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations,

drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade

softening, and slope instability.

C. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,

property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a

manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other

flow-control devices per Maryland Department of Environment requirements.




D. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to

maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.

If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering

system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.

1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering.

E. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being

removed by the dewatering operation.




Earthwork 023000 - 1

SECTION 023000 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. Division 2 Section “Site Clearing” for clearing operations and erosion/sediment

control measures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over raceways in a trench, including

haunches to support sides of raceways.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Selected Backfill: Material selected for desirable compaction or other characteristics used to

backfill an excavation.

C. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

D. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

E. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered below elevations.

G. Fill: Soil materials approved to fill in trenches or holes in earth.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, slabs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances,

or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt

pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a

cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a

fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables.




1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as

damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Contractor shall follow all OSHA requirements and all local, state and federal regulations for

soil excavations.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others

unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Owner not less than seventy-two hours in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

3. Contact utility-locator service to document Project area before excavating.

B. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating all existing

underground utilities prior to excavation, using an independent utility locator. Any damage

done to the utilities shall be repaired immediately at Contractor’s expense. The Contractor

shall also call Miss Utility at 1-800-257-7777 to obtain utility information at least 48 hours

prior to excavation. Obtain all possible existing utility location information from the State

Representative as well. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials.

B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and

SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any

dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and

PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of

optimum moisture content at time of compaction.




D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a

1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-

inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing

a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-

inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and

natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-

inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused

by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by

earthwork operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 2

Section “Site Clearing”.

C. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against

freezing temperatures or frost.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on

prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage

ditches.




2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Division 2 Section "Dewatering," to keep

subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until

dewatering is no longer required.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be

classified as earth.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;

underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together

with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized

excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as

rock excavation is earth excavation.

3.5 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact borrow backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the

following:

1. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

2. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

3. Removing trash and debris.

4. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.6 SOIL FILL

A. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

B. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.7 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or

contain frost or ice.




2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

dry unit weight.

3.8 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose

depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil material evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations,

and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit

weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each

layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3.9 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes.

Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations

indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.

3.10 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as

follows:

1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

2. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

3. Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer.

4. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers

of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3

inches thick.

5. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit

weight according to ASTM D 1557.




3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.

Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades where surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they

lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent

work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.12 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove waste material, excavated soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it

off Owner’s property.




Lawns and Grasses 029200 - 1

SECTION 029200 - LAWNS AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Seeding.

2. Topsoil and soil amendments.

3. Fertilizers.

4. Lawn renovation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with

stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to

become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of

a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.

E. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic

matter and soil organisms.


A. Maryland Turf Grass Law and Regulations published by the Maryland Department of Agriculture

(MDA), as amended to date.

B. Recommended Turfgrass Cultivars for Certified Sod and Professional Seed Mixtures (TT-77)

published by the University of Maryland, as amended to date.




C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful

lawn establishment.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.

2. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours’ normal travel time from Installer’s place

of business to Project site.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with

initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Spring Planting: March 1 to June 15.

2. Fall Planting: August 1 to October 15.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions

permit.

C. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating all existing underground

utilities prior to excavation, using an independent utility locator. Any damage done to the utilities

shall be repaired immediately at Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall also call Miss Utility

at 1-800-257-7777 to obtain utility information at least 48 hours prior to excavation. Obtain all

possible existing utility location information from the State Representative as well. Do not

interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by

Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to

requirements indicated.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is

established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if

lawn is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with MDA regulations for purity and

germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less

than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 90 percent (3) varieties of improved tall fescues.

b. 10 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis).

2.2 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content;

free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant

growth.

1. Existing On-Site Topsoil: Reuse suitable surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability

of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones,

clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when

quantities are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained sites

where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2. Borrow Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources.

Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4

inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

3. Amend Existing On-site Topsoil: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce suitable

topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface of roots, plants,

sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-

site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil

occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2.3 PLANTING ACCESSORIES

A. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for

application.




2.4 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent

potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by

planting operations.

3.3 LAWN PREPARATION

A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones

larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter

and legally dispose of them off Owner’s property.

1. Apply fertilizer over dry soil before applying topsoil.

2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and incorporate into topsoil

using suitable equipment and method, to a minimum depth of 4 inches but not less than

required to meet finish grads after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if

planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy or excessively wet.

C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly

fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove

ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted

in the immediate future.

D. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to

dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

E. Before planting, restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.




3.4 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity

exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles

to each other.

1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.

2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of 5 to 8 lb/1000 sq. ft.

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Install straw mulch uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a uniform cover of 1-1/2

inches in loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.

2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft..

Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to

mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.

3.5 LAWN RENOVATION

A. Renovate existing lawn damaged by Contractor’s operations, such as storage of materials or

equipment and movement of vehicles.

B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil.

C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor’s operations, including oil

drippings, fuel spills, stone gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil.

D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate and rake existing lawn.

E. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply herbicides as required. Do not

use pre-emergence herbicides.

F. Dispose all waste and foreign materials off Owner’s property.

G. Till striped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a depth of 6 inches.

H. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix

thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet

finish grades.

I. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns.

J. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established.




3.6 LAWN MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and

other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas to produce a uniformly smooth

lawn. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

B. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey

water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch.

Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water lawn with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall

precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified

height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf

growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and

become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to

maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow grass to a height of 2 to 3 inches.

D. Lawn Post-fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to lawn area.

3.7 SATISFACTORY LAWNS

A. Lawn installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Owner:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of

grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage

exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue

maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.

3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris, created by lawn work, from paved areas. Clean wheels of

vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas

from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove

after lawn is established.

C. Remove non-degradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.


July 12, 2021 Replace Fitness Center A/C Camp Frettred Readiness Center

Watkins Partnership Inc DGS M-139-170-003

Cast-In-Place Concrete 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0, General and Supplementary


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture

design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the generator pad.


1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for backfill and compaction procedures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products

and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's

plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following sections,

unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements."

2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories."

3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports."

4. "Concrete Mixtures."

5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

D. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK

A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and

source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag or IP,

portland-pozzolan cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M; potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in

hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Water: Potable.

B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.




2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi at 28 days unless otherwise noted.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of slabs

to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M,

and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting

reinforcement.

3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.

3.4 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and

defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.




B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed

surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed

surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather

protection during curing.

B. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

C. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a

combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12

inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.

Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof

tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage

during curing period.

3.6 REPAIRS

A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.




Penetration Firestopping 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section describes firestopping materials and procedures:

1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated construction, including both empty openings

and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations.

2. Expansion and control joints in fire-rated walls, floors, floor-ceiling and roof ceiling

assemblies.

3. Void at the intersections of fire-rated walls, floors, floor-ceilings, and roof ceiling

assemblies.

4. Intersections and penetrations of floors, ceilings, walls, and columns.

5. Firestopping penetrations, created under the Work of this Project, in-resistance-rated

construction at existing buildings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The following publications govern the work of this Section and are hereby incorporated in the

Contract Documents as if bound herein. The Standards described apply generally unless

specifically indicated otherwise in the text. They are identified below by their publishers and are

referred to in the text by basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a. ASTM E 84-91a Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

b. ASTM E 814-88 Fire Test of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

c. ASTM C 1193-91 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants

2. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

a. UL-05 Fire Resistance Directory

b. UL-723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

c. UL-1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data, installation instructions, and the fire-test data

and/or report as appropriate for the fire resistance rated construction and location. Submittal

shall indicate the firestopping material to be provided with each type of application.




B. Shop Drawings: Show illustration details as appropriate for the fire resistance rated construction

and locations required. When more than 5 penetrations are to receive firestopping, drawings

shall indicate location and type of application.

1. Where project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting

agency’s illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping

manufacturer’s fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgement or equivalent fire-

resistance-rated assembly.


A. Certificates: Certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specific

requirements. The label or listing of the Underwriters Laboratories will be acceptable evidence.

In lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate may be submitted from an approved,

nationally recognized testing agency equipped to perform such services, stating that the items

have been tested and conform to the specified requirements and testing.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturers certification stating that each installer is qualified and

trained to install the specified requirements and testing.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing a material or combination of materials to

form an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases, and maintain the

integrity of fire resistance rate walls, barriers, partitions, floors, floor/ceiling/roof assemblies,

including through penetrations and construction joints. Through-penetrations include the

annular spaces around pipes, tubes, conduits, wires, cables, and vents. Construction joints

include those used to accommodate expansion, contraction, wind, or seismic movement;

firestopping materials shall not interfere with required movement of joints.

1.7 STORAGE AND DELIVERY

A. Materials shall be delivered in the original un-opened packages or containers showing names of

the manufacturer and the brand name of the product. Materials shall be stored off the ground

and shall be protected from damage and exposure to elements. Damaged or deteriorated

materials shall be removed from the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

A. Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured products complying with the

following minimum requirements:

1. Fire Hazard Classification: Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke

developed rating or 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723.




Materials shall be non-toxic to humans at all stages of the application and performance of

the materials.

2. Fire Resistance Rating: Firestopping will not be required to have a greater fire resistance

rating than that of the assembly in which it is being installed within. Fire resistance

ratings of construction joints, as described in Part 1 Article “System Description” and

gaps such as the construction in which they occur.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to

comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles

remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not

allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining

surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be

permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains.

Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with System Performance Requirements Article in Part 1, with ASTM C1193

and with the sealant manufacturer’s installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products

and applications indicated.




B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths

required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of

firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

D. Firestopping materials shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration,

subject to tolerances established by the manufacturer. Firestopping for filling floor voids 4

inches or more in any direction shall be capable of supporting the same load as the floor is

designed to support or shall be protected by permanent barrier to prevent loading of traffic in

the firestopped area. Firestopping shall be provided in the following locations:

1. Penetrations of duct, conduit, tubing, cable and pipe through floors and through fire-

resistance rated walls, barriers, partitions, floors, ceilings, and roof assemblies.

2. Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases, elevator shafts, and utility chutes.

3. Gaps at the intersection of floor and curtain walls, including inside of hollow curtain

walls at the floor slab.

4. Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions.

5. Gaps at perimeter of fire resistance rated walls, barriers, and partitions, such as between

the top or walls and the bottom of roof decks.

6. Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rated construction.

E. Penetrations made in existing building walls shall be sealed and firestopped the same day they

are made. Existing holes existing building walls abutting new construction or within areas of

new construction uncovered or created by demolition procedures shall be sealed and

firestopped.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and

that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that

penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove

damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems

complying with specified requirements.




Common Work Results For HVAC 230500 - 1

SECTION 230500-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division Specification Sections, as applicable, shall apply to this section.

B. References

1. 2015 International Building Code

2. 2015 International Mechanical Code

3. 2015 National Standard Plumbing Code

4. 2015 International Energy Conservation Code

5. 2017 National Electric Code

6. NFPA Standards

7. ASHRAE Handbooks and Manuals

8. SMACNA Manuals

9. County Amendments

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Piping" includes pipe, fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories that comprise a system.

B. "Ductwork" includes ducts, fittings, housings, dampers, hangers, and other accessories, which

comprise a system.

C. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,

unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

D. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied

spaces, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, air handling unit service corridors, and

accessible shafts.

E. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations and at grade locations.

F. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings, chases, and duct shafts.

G. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions

and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.

Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

H. Conditioned Space: Finished spaces and exposed interior spaces that are air conditioned.

Examples include offices, corridors, etc., that are served by air conditioning equipment. Return-

air plenums are not conditioned space.




I. Return-air Plenums: Space between ceiling and structure above when return air is transferred

from space to ceiling plenum in lieu of directly ducting return air from the space.

J. K-Factor: Number of British thermal units of heat transmitted per square foot per degree

Fahrenheit temperature difference through a material with flat, parallel sides one inch apart.

K. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

L. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Certificates of Compliance for pressure vessels.

C. Submit shop drawings or cuts showing construction size, arrangement, operating clearances,

performance characteristics and capacity of materials and equipment. Each item of equipment

proposed shall be a standard catalog product of the approved manufacturer.

D. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval shall be properly

labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used.

E. Submit access door locations to the Engineer for approval. Equipment requiring access doors

shall not be installed prior to approval of access door locations.

F. Coordination Drawings:

1. Provide coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section “Project

Management and Coordination”. Detail major elements, components, and systems of

mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and

building components (i.e. electrical, plumbing, sprinkler, structural and Engineerural

work). Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and

coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the

following:

a. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem

movement.

b. Clearances for installation and maintaining insulation.

c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,

including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

d. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.

e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.




g. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into

building during construction.

h. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and

ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

i. See Division 23, Section “Metal Ducts” for ductwork installation drawing

requirements.

j. Reflected Ceiling Plans:

1) Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2) Other systems installed in same space as ducts.

3) Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide

access to dampers and other operating devices.

4) Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,

speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special molding.

5) Refer to Engineerural ceiling plans for additional requirements.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with the latest issue of the codes, rules,

regulations, and recommendations.

1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE:

A. Examine the site, determine all conditions and circumstances under which the work must be

performed, and make all necessary allowances for same. No additional cost to the Owner will be

permitted for Contractor’s failure to do so.

1.6 CONTRACTOR AND/OR SUBCONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS:

A. A contractor bidding as prime contractor shall be a Maryland-licensed HVACR Master or Master

Restricted contractor who is qualified in the areas of work included in the Project.

B. The successful contractor shall agree to employ only individuals who hold valid licenses issued

by the State HVACR Board of the Department of Labor, Licensing and Regulation to provide, or

assist in providing, heating ventilating, air conditioning, or refrigerating system installation or

service required for the project.




C. If the successful contractor subcontracts any or all of the heating, ventilating, air conditioning, or

refrigerating system installation or service required for a project, the subcontractor must possess

the appropriate license required and issued by the State HVACR Board.

D. All heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and refrigerating system subcontractors shall

consistently use only individuals who hold the appropriate licenses issued by the State HVACR

Board to provide or assist in providing heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and refrigerating

system installation or service required for a project.

E. A Contractor or Subcontractor is any individual, partnership, corporation or any entity,

performing work by Contract or subcontract on this project.

F. Acceptance of a Contractor or Subcontractor will not relieve the Contractor or subcontractor of

any contractual requirements or his responsibility to supervise and coordinate the work, of

various trades.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

C. Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and

placing of materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care

shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials,

including Owner furnished, are damaged.

D. Mechanical equipment delivered to the job site shall be stored under roof or other approved

covering, on pedestals above the ground. Enclosures for equipment shall be weatherproof. Any

motors involved in the work that are not totally enclosed and electrical/electronic components

shall be stored in a heated area with a minimum temperature of 50 deg. F. Valves shall be stored

under roof on wood pedestals above ground. Pipe for project use shall be stored above grade in

such a manner to prevent entrance of foreign materials. Pipe shall be fitted with end caps or seals

to prevent moisture and debris from entering pipe. Insulation shall be store under roof or in

trailers, adequately protected from the weather. Follow written instructions and recommendations

of the manufacturer and requirements of the Engineer in lubrication, protection, and maintenance

of equipment during storage.

E. If materials or equipment are found to be in poor condition at the time of being installed, the

Engineer may, at his discretion, order the Contractor to furnish and install new equipment or

materials at no cost to the Owner.

1.8 GENERAL

A. Regulatory Requirements




1. Work shall conform to the requirements of the codes, laws and ordinances of Baltimore

County, Maryland National Fire Protection Association, American Society of Mechanical

Engineers and other authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Comply with applicable codes, laws, standard practices.

3. Comply with the standards of good practice as outlined in the ASHRAE Guide, the Sheet

Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's Association's "Duct Manual", and the

Apprentice Training Manual of the Steam Fitters Union.

B. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and

connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If

minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

C. Control wiring:

1. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway (3/4” conduit minimum),

unless otherwise noted.

2. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway (3/4” conduit minimum),

unless otherwise noted.

D. Give necessary notices and obtain required permits. Pay fees and other costs, including utility

connections or extensions in connection with the work. File necessary plans, prepare documents

and obtain necessary approvals of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Obtain required

certificates of inspection and deliver same to the Engineer before request for acceptance and final

payment for the work.

1.9 SUPERVISION AND COORDINATION

A. Provide complete supervision, direction, scheduling and coordination of work under the Contract,

including that of subcontractors.

B. Coordinate work under division 23 with the work of all other construction trades.

C. Coordinate work with existing conditions.

D. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

E. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete

and other structural components as they are constructed.

F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are

concealed behind finished surfaces.

1.10 VARIANCES

A. Where conflicts exist within the contract documents, request clarification prior to the submission

of a bid. If clarification is not requested, provide the work representing the higher cost and

quality.




1.11 WARRANTY

A. Certain items of equipment shall be warranted for a longer time than the general warranty period.

Provide for service or replacement required in connection with the warranty of these items,

Contractor shall repair or replace equipment and components that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period of the project as a whole or on such other date

agreed between the parties.

B. See Division 1 and General Conditions for general requirements.

C. Provide service of the equipment manufacturer or his authorized representative, if required to

achieve specified performance of equipment provided.

D. During the warranty period, service equipment provided except filter replacement and belt

replacement. Provide labor and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions

for service and maintenance. Prior to the start of warranty period, provide to the Engineer for

approval, a schedule of required maintenance operations to be performed during the warranty

period and required periodically thereafter for each system and item of equipment. Thereafter,

monthly reports shall be submitted to the Owner for describing actual service performed. Forty-

eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given to Owner prior to work required.

E. All equipment, labor and systems shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for period of two years

minimum unless otherwise noted after the date of substantial completion. Contractor shall be

fully responsible for all repairs and adjustments to equipment and systems during this guaranty

period.

F. Repairs and replacements: If the Owner finds work that is defective, inferior or not in

compliance with the Contract during the guarantee period the Owner will inform the Contractor

in writing. The Contractor shall promptly perform the following at no additional cost to the

owner:

1. Replace all defective work in a satisfactory manner.

2. Correct all damage to the building or contents which occurred due to the defective work.

G. The Owner may choose to have defective work corrected at the expense of the Contractor if the

Contractor fails to proceed promptly to repair defective work in an accordance with this

guarantee.

1.12 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Items shown and not specifically called for, or items specified and not specifically indicated or

detailed on the Drawings, or items neither specified nor shown, but which are reasonably

incidental to and commonly required.

B. Furnish the services of an experienced full time field superintendent who shall be constantly in

charge of the installation of work provided under this Division. Superintendent shall have

demonstrated experience with projects of comparable size and complexity and shall be approved

by the Engineer.




C. The quality of workmanship required in the execution of the work shall be the finest and highest

obtainable, working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be satisfactory to the

Engineer and his decision as to acceptable quality is final.

1.13 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION

A. No equipment shall be operated for testing or trial use until there has been full compliance with

the equipment manufacturers’ specifications and instructions for lubrication, alignment, direction

of rotation, balance, and other applicable considerations.

B. Particular care shall be taken to verify that equipment is completely assembled and properly

lubricated, and grease and oil cases and reservoirs have been filled to the correct level with the

recommended lubricant.

C. Where specified, provide services of the manufacturer or his authorized representative to witness,

supervise, or assist in the installation and start-up equipment provided under this Division.

1.14 DRAWINGS

A. The contract drawings are generally indicative of the work to be installed, but they do not show

all offsets, fittings and similar details required, which shall be provided to meet the job

conditions. In areas where work is installed in close proximity to work of other trades or within

trades covered by this Division of the Specifications, prepare larger scale drawings consisting of

plans and sections to show how work is to be installed in relation to work of other trades.

B. Do not scale the drawings. Consult the other disciplines drawings for locations (such as

structure and equipment); where same are not precisely located, obtain this information prior to

start of work.

C. Although the location of materials and equipment may be shown on the drawings in a certain

place, the construction may develop conditions that render this location inaccessible or

impractical. Before fabricating and installing the work, the Contractor shall call the condition to

the attention of the Engineer for direction of any materials and/or equipment inaccessible or

impractical. When requested by the Engineer a detailed drawing of the proposed departure due to

field conditions, or their causes, shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval. The Engineer

shall make final written decisions as to the conditions, which require the changing of work.

1.15 RECORD DRAWING

A. See Division 1, for general requirements.

B. Carefully record the actual locations of each piece of equipment, control devices, pipe, valves,

ducts, etc., including dimensions to locate underground work, and work when different from the

contact drawings.




1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. See Division 1 for general requirements of demonstration and training.

B. Upon completion of work and of tests, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for

operating and demonstrating the systems and equipment.

C. The instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with parts of the installation on which he is to give

instruction and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance

work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever necessary and as specified.

D. Instructions shall include a general description of each system together with specific instructions

describing routine and emergency procedures required of the building personnel for operating

and maintaining each system. The instructions shall include the name or label, location, and

function of operating equipment and controls. Operating modes and the procedures for indexing

each mode shall be clearly described. Include lubrication charts and schedules of frequency of

lubrication for equipment, designating each point of lubrication and type of lubrication to be

used. Listings of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service organizations for each

items of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for same shall be included.

E. Provide operation and maintenance manuals and record product data as specified in Division 1.

1.17 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIGITAL VIDEO

A. Submit two DVD discs within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Name of Contractor.

d. Date video was recorded.

e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

2. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, 3-

ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each

binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding videotape.

Include name of Project and date of videotape on each page.

1.18 FIRE SAFE MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, materials and equipment shall conform to UL, NFPA or ASTM

Standards for fire safety with smoke and fire hazard rating not exceeding flame spread of 25 and

smoke developed of 50.

1.19 FIRE PREVENTION

A. As minimum, one five-pound CO2 extinguisher shall be provided with each work crew.




1.20 SINGULAR NUMBER

A. See Division 1 for general requirements.

B. Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, such as

“value”, such reference applies to as many such devices as are required to complete the

installation, shown or implied.

1.21 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal review by the Engineer is intended to assist Contractor in his ability to comply with

the Contract Documents. Review of submittal is only for general conformance with the design

concept as given in Contract Documents. Where Contractor Submittals do not clearly indicate

the intended materials for use, they may be returned without review or be rejected. Where

differences between Contract Documents and Submittals are not noted, Contractor shall comply

with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor accepts all responsibility for quantities,

dimensions, details, coordination of trades and job safety.

B. Definition:

1. Action Submittals: Submit to Engineer for review.

2. Informational Submittals: Provide submittals in Operational and Maintenance Manuals.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 20 working (business) days for initial review of each submittal.

Allow Additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer

will advise Engineer when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal review: Allow 15 working (business) days for each resubmittal.

3. Engineer will review an initial submittal and one (1) resubmittal. Any additional reviews

shall be billed to the General Contractor on an hourly basis at the Engineers current

billing rates and will not be returned to the General Contractor until payment has been

received. This shall not be cause for any delay claims or additional compensation claims


1.22 PENETRATION OF WATERPROOF CONSTRUCTION

A. Coordinate the work to minimize penetration of waterproof construction, including roofs, exterior

walls and interior waterproof construction. Where such penetrations are necessary, furnish and

install all necessary curbs, sleeves, flashings, fittings and caulking to make penetrations

absolutely watertight.

B. Furnish and install duct sleeves, lintels, etc specifically designed for application and install in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, SMACNA and as required by other divisions of the

specifications. The contractor shall be responsible for the sizes and locations.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS TO BE USED

A. Items are specified by designations such as trade name, manufacturer's name, catalog number

and indicate the capacity and quality of the products or materials to be used on this project.

B. Only products indicated on Contract Documents by name and model number have been

coordinated with other trades. Coordinate items of other manufacturer with other trades.

C. The work under this Section of the Specification shall include the furnishing of labor, materials

and equipment for the installation of complete plumbing system to provide continuous and

satisfactory service.

2.2 FOUNDATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide foundations, supports, curbs and bases for equipment, as necessary for satisfactory

installation and operation of equipment. Furnish and set anchor bolts. Provide vibration

isolation.

B. Concrete pads shall be 6 inches thick minimum, thicker if necessary to accommodate a particular

piece of equipment. Exterior pads shall extend a minimum of 12” beyond the edge of the

equipment. Exterior pads shall be reinforced and shall have edges turned down to below the frost

line. Exterior pads shall extend eight inches beyond edges of equipment and shall be sloped for

drainage.

2.3 EXTERIOR DUCT AND PIPING SUPPORTS

A. Provide support for exterior duct and piping as necessary for satisfactory installation and

operation. Coordinate heights, weights, sizes, clamps, accessories, etc prior to purchasing and

installation. Supports shall not penetrate roof and shall not void roof warranty.

B. Rubber / steel pipe supports shall be manufactured under a strict quality control program assuring quality

product delivered to the jobsite. Pipe supports that are damaged shall not be installed.

C. Workmanship: All supports to be installed by a qualified contractor and installed in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. All work shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes and laws having

jurisdiction.

2. All work shall conform to accepted industry and trade standards for supports installations.

D. Materials:

1. Curb/Mat base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer, HDPE (High

Density Poly Ethylene) or Polycarbonate with a uniform load for the appropriate material or

equipment. In addition, each base to have a reflective red or yellow stripe.

2. Steel frame: Steel, strut galvanized per ASTM A653 or strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for bridge

series or stainless steel.

3. Attaching hardware: Zinc-plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.




4. All metal parts shall be hot dip galvanized.

E. Install per manufacturer’s requirements.

F. If gravel top roof, gravel must be removed around and under supports.

G. Provide compatible pad (such as but not limited to Eco Foot) where required to help support

disperse concentrated loads and protect membrane.

H. Manufacturer shall be Dura-Block by Eaton, Mirco Industries, Inc or approved equal.

2.4 MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise specified, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches and variable

frequency controllers shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor. Refer to Division 26

Sections for requirements.

2.5 PACKING MATERIAL FOR PENETRATIONS

A. Mineral fiber; non-combustible; resistant to water, mildew, and vermin. Expanding resilient

foams manufactured for this purpose are an acceptable alternative only if the material density is

at least 3.0 pounds per cubic foot.

2.6 HEAT TRACE

A. Provide a complete UL listed system of heaters and components approved specifically for pipe

heat tracing as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. The self-regulating heater shall consist of two nickel-plated copper bus wires embedded in a

radiation cross-linked semi-conductive polymer core. The heater shall be capable of varying its

heat output along its entire length, allowing the heater to cross over itself without overheating.

The heater shall be covered by a polyolefin dielectric jacket rated 300 Vdc at 105ºC and tinned

copper braid (12 AWG equivalent wire size). In addition to a tinned copper braid, the heating

cable shall be covered by a polyolefin outer jacket for protection from aqueous inorganic

chemicals.

C. The heater shall operate on line voltage of 120 V without the use of transformers. Power output

of the heater shall be 5 watts per foot.

D. The heating cable shall be suitable for use on metallic and nonmetallic piping. On nonmetallic

piping, the cable shall be attached to the pipe with a parallel covering of aluminum tape. The

heating cable shall be controlled by a bimetallic pipe wall sensing thermostat preset at 40 degrees

F. Installation shall be per the manufacturer’s installation instructions and design guide for proper

installation and layout methods.

E. The insulation shall not be installed with staples. Insulation jackets should be closed with

adhesive to avoid damage to the heating cable. Heating cable should be tested with a

megohmeter (megger) between the heating cable bus wires and the metallic ground braid. While




a 2,500 Vdc megger test is recommended, the minimum acceptable level for testing is 500 Vdc.

This test should be performed a minimum of three times.

1. Prior to installation while the cable is still on a reel.

2. After installation of heating cable and completion of circuit fabrication kits including any

splice kits) but prior to installation of thermal insulation.

3. After insulation of thermal insulation but prior to connection to power.

F. Heat Tracing shall be manufactured by Thermon Manufacturing Company, Chromalox or

Raychem.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. See additional information in Division 7.

B. System description

1. Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing a material or combination of

materials to form an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases, and

maintain the integrity of fire resistance rate walls, barriers, partitions, floors,

floor/ceiling/roof assemblies, including through penetrations and construction joints.

Through-penetrations include the annular spaces around pipes, tubes, conduits, wires,

cables, and vents. Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion,

contraction, wind, or seismic movement; firestopping materials shall not interfere with

required movement of joints.

C. Storage and delivery

1. Materials shall be delivered in the original un-opened packages or containers showing

names of the manufacturer and the brand name of the product. Materials shall be stored

off the ground and shall be protected from damage and exposure to elements. Damaged

or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site.

D. Firestopping materials

1. Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured products complying

with the following minimum requirements:

2. Fire hazard classification: material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke

developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723.

Materials shall be non-toxic to humans at all stages of the application and performance of

the materials.

3. Fire resistance rating: firestopping will not be required to have a greater fire resistance

rating than that of the assembly in which it is being installed within. Fire resistance

ratings of construction joints and gaps such as the construction in which they occur.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions. Modifications to work required to

allow for existing conditions shall be provided. Submit proposed modifications to the Engineer

for approval prior to installation.




B. Relocate existing hangers and supports where necessary to install new work. Maximum spacing

requirements shall apply for relocated supports.

C. Coordinate interruptions in service of existing systems with the Owner. Provide temporary

connections to maintain operation of existing systems.

D. Coordinate new work and existing conditions.

E. Verify existing piping, ductwork and equipment locations, sizes and inverts prior to any work or

installation.

F. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove

damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 MANNER OF INSTALLATION

A. Piping and ductwork shall be installed to preserve access to valves, dampers and equipment.

Valves, dampers and equipment which require frequent service, adjustment or control and which

cannot be located in a readily accessible and safe place, shall be provided with extension devices

and remote operators, as necessary and as accepted for use by the Engineer.

B. Piping and ductwork shall be run to follow the lines of the building and to allow the maximum

headroom consistent with proper pitch. Piping subject to thermal expansion shall be arranged to

permit movement without damage to the piping, ductwork and equipment.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. Furnish the services of an experienced full time field superintendent who shall be constantly in

charge of the installation of work provided under this Division. Superintendent shall have

demonstrated experience with projects of comparable size and complexity and shall be approved

by the Engineer.

B. The quality of workmanship required in the execution of the work shall be the finest and highest

obtainable, working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be satisfactory to the

Engineer and his decision as to acceptable quality is final.

3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the best engineering practice and

in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Auxiliary piping, valves,

and electric connections recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper operation shall

be provided.

3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping

systems.




B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved by the Architect.

C. Install piping at indicated slopes.

D. Install piping free of sags and bends.

E. Install low point drains and airvents.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

I. Unless indicated otherwise, sleeves are not required for core-drilled penetrations in solid concrete

construction, except when located in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other potential wet

areas. Seal annular space between pipe or pipe insulation and concrete as specified for sleeves.

J. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

4. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section

"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

3.6 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

2. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.7 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not

indicated.




B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. In no case shall equipment be

installed with service clearance less than manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.8 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish. Provide complete new finish if, in the opinion of the

Engineer or Owner, the factory finishes are severely damaged.

1. Touch up threads of zinc coated screwed pipe with Rustoleum primer and one coat of

enamel conforming to painting specification.

2. Prepare piping and ductwork and associated hangers specified to be painted to accept

field paint.

3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. See Division 1 for general requirements.

B. Cutting and patching of building materials shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

Surfaces, which are damaged by the Contractor, shall be repaired or provided with new materials.

Patching and materials shall be done with materials and methods similar to adjacent work,

subject to approval of the Engineer. Structural members shall not be cut or penetrated unless

indicated on the drawings.

3.10 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established benchmarks. Work shall

agree with these established lines and levels. Verify measurements at site and check correctness

of same as related to the work.

B. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements or conditions,

and those indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the drawings and

specifications, he shall notify the Construction Manager and shall not proceed with his work until

he has received instruction from the Construction Manager.

3.11 RIGGING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Verify that rigging path for equipment prior to start of work or ordering of materials. Verify

accessways and weight carrying capacity of building features, including elevators, floors, walls,

ceilings, roofs, and related features. When equipment or sections of equipment are larger than

available accessways, equipment shall be ordered in a knocked-down configuration for re-




assembly at the site. Submit in writing to Engineer where problems are encountered that may

prohibit rigging of equipment into space with the proposed solutions.

B. Use planking or cribbing as required to protect adjoining construction from damage. Protect

equipment from damage until construction is completed.

3.12 WELDING

A. Welding piping shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the ASME Code for

Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, and ANSI/ASME B31.9 – Building

Services Piping, Contractor shall comply with requirements of federal, state or local agencies

having legal jurisdiction that are more stringent than the above ANSI/ASME Codes.

B. State, country, and city fire prevention code requirements, fire and safety regulations, and NFPA

241 shall be complied with, including the provision of appropriate portable fire extinguishers.

Prior to performing welding within the building, notify the Construction Manager in advance of

areas where welding will occur, and submit for approval a plan for protection of the building and

occupants. Proceed only upon receipt of Construction Manager’s approval and provide

reasonable barriers, coverings, etc., as required or requested by the Construction Manager for

protection of the installed work and building occupants. In regards to welding operations within

the building, maintain a negative pressure within the work area to prevent the migration of smoke

and fumes to occupied areas of the building. Provide temporary exhaust fans and smoke removal

systems as required – discharge of smoke and fumes shall be to the building exterior in a manner

to not be recirculated back into building through areaways, windows, etc. and away from public

accessway.

C. Provide single-vee type butt welds, unless specified otherwise. Joint configuration shall conform

to ANSI B16.25.

D. Before welding is performed, submit a copy of the Contractor’s Standard Welding Procedure

Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. Before a welder shall perform welding, submit a copy of the Manufacturer’s Record of Welder or

Welding Operator Qualification Tests as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

F. Welds shall have penetration complete to the inside diameter of the pipe and the recommended

spacing and bevels between ends of pipe prior to welding shall be used to assure full penetration

for pipe service conditions of 350°F and above (e.g. all medium pressure steam piping). Weld

penetrations for pipe service conditions less than 350°F shall be in accordance with the

applicable ANSI/ASME Code.

G. Visual and nondestructive examinations shall be performed to detect the surface and internal

discontinuities in completed welds by an independent testing agency hired by the Construction

Manager. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with an independent testing agency so that welds

can be examined by the independent testing agency. The types and extent of non-destructive

examinations required for pipe welds are as shown in Table 136.4 of ASME Code for Pressure

Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping and as contained herein. If requirements for visual

and nondestructive examinations are to be other than contained herein, the degree of examination




and basis of rejection shall be a matter of prior written agreement between the Construction

Manager and the independent testing agency. The extent of visual and non-destructive

examinations shall be as follows:

1. The independent testing agency shall test a minimum of 10% of the total length or

number of piping welds by utilizing radiograph, ultrasonic testing, sectioning or a

combination of these methods as determined by the independent testing agency. If a

random weld test reveals that a weld fails to meet the minimum quality requirements, an

additional 10 percent of the welds in that same group shall be tested at the Contractor’s

expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. If the additional welds examined meet the

quality requirements, the entire group of welds represented shall be accepted and the

defective welds shall be repaired. If any of the additional welds examined also fail to

meet the quality requirements as determined by the independent testing agency, that

entire group of welds shall be rejected. Remove and re-weld rejected welds or examine

rejected welds (at the Contractor’s expense and at no additional cost to the Owner) and

remove and re-weld defects.

2. Welds shall be visually examined as follows:

a. Before welding – for compliance to the qualified welding procedure.

b. During welding – for conformance to the qualified welding procedure.

c. After welding – for cracks, contour and finish, bead reinforcement, undercutting,

overlap, and size of fillet welds.

3. Welds determined to be unacceptable shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor, at

no additional cost to the Owner, in accordance with the applicable standards. Repair

defects discovered between weld passes before additional weld material is deposited.

Wherever a defect is removed, and repair by welding is not required, the affected area

shall be blended into the surrounding surface eliminating sharp notches, crevices, or the

same test methods that first revealed the defect to ensure that the defect has been

eliminated. After re-welding, re-examine the repaired area by the same test methods

originally used for that area. For repairs to base material, the minimum examination shall

be the same as required for butt welds. Indication of a defect shall be regarded as a defect

unless re-evaluation by non-destructive examination testing or by surface conditioning

shows that no unacceptable indications are present. The use of foreign material to mask,

fill in, seal, or disguise welding defects will not be permitted.

H. Pipe welds shall not be covered prior to examination by the independent testing agency. Should

the independent testing agency encounter pipe joints that are covered, Contractor shall remove

covering and replace with new covering, at no additional cost to the Owner, following

examination by the independent testing agency. Coverings shall include, but not limited to,

insulation, jacketing, outer conduit closure kits, special coatings, and backfill. Examinations of

welds for the metal conduits for pre-insulated conduit piping systems may be covered without

examination by the independent testing agency.

I. Welding at hangers, supports and plates to structural members shall conform to American

Welding Society, Inc. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel.

J. When requested by the independent testing agency or Engineer, submit identifying stenciled test

coupons made by any welder in question. The contractor shall require a welder to retake the tests

when, in the opinion of the Engineer or independent testing agency, the work of the welder

creates a reasonable doubt as to his proficiency. Tests, when required, shall be conducted at no

additional expense to the Owner; and the welder in question shall not be permitted to work as a

welder on this project until he is re-qualified.




K. The use of backing rings shall be at the discretion of the installing Contractor provided that the

Contractor prepares and aligns pipes precisely to melt though to the inside surface – making a

full penetration weld. At the direction of the independent testing agency, the Contractor may be

directed to use backing rings (at no additional cost to the owner) when deemed necessary by the

independent testing agency after examination of the pipe welds.

L. When weld testing or examination is performed as required herein, the corresponding written

certified test reports shall be submitted.

3.13 ERECTION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

3.14 CLEANING

A. See Division 1, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of equipment and material and leave in a neat,

clean condition ready for painting.

3.15 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Locate equipment that must be serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible positions.

Equipment shall include, but not be limited to, terminal units, coils, valves, motors, controllers,

dampers, drain points, cleanouts, etc. Provide adequate means to access equipment for repair and

maintenance including capabilities for platforms, fall protection systems, and anchorage points.

B. Where required or where directed, provide access doors. Doors installed in fire-rated walls or

shafts shall be labeled and shall match rating of the construction. Doors shall be sufficient size to

allow access to components, except minimum size shall be 16” x 16”. Access panels in ceilings

for all plumbing and heating valves to be 24”x 24” minimum. Where equipment requires access

to various parts, such as air terminal units require access to the controller and valve and piping

appurtenances for the reheat coil, locate appurtenances requiring access such that all devices can

be maintained from single door. For items that require access greater than 3 feet above the

ceiling, provide minimum 4 feet x 4 feet removable ceiling panel to facilitate top of a folding

ladder placed above the ceiling plane.

C. The Contractor at no expense to the Owner shall rework equipment deemed inaccessible by the

Engineer.

3.16 FLASHING

A. Openings for pipes and ductwork through waterproofed areas shall be flashed.

3.17 HVAC TRAINING

A. See section 017900 “Demonstration and Training”.



Common Motor Requirements For HVAC Equipment 230513 - 1

SECTION 230513-COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a

component of equipment.


A. Provide informational submittals in Operation and Maintenance Manuals in addition to action

submittals and section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data”.

B. Product Data: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate data and ratings; shipping,

installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting arrangements; size, type and

location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information on

coatings or finishes.

C. For each factory-installed motor or motor-driven equipment including at least the following:

1. Unit or motor data defining efficiency at incremental loads (10% or smaller increments)

from full load to no load.

2. Data to enable calculation of motor load at design duty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply

with the following:

1. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.

2. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor

replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for

belt tensioning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another

Section.

2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,

other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.

B. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in

HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

C. Motors shall be energy-efficient. Efficiency greater than 95.5% per NEMA MG 1, 10, 11 (as

appropriate) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Motors ½ HP and Larger: Three phase.

B. Motors Smaller Than ½ HP: Single phase.

C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which

motor is connected.

E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drop proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.

F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.




H. Enclosure: Open drip proof, unless indicated otherwise.

I. Speed: 1750 RPM, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor

application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Split-phase start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed,

pre-lubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.





Vibration Controls For HVAC Piping and Equipment 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548-VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Vibration Isolators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each type of vibration

isolation device.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide vibration isolators manufactured by a firm specializing in this type of work for

equipment and piping that is capable of transmitting noise and vibration to the building

structures.

B. Isolators shall be designed to suit vibration frequency to be absorbed. Provide isolator units of

area distribution to obtain proper resiliency under machinery load and impact. Where unequal

distribution of weight occurs, design isolators for uniform deflection under imposed load.

C. Examine the contract drawings for sizes, horsepowers, rotational speeds, equipment location,

length of span between columns and beams and construction type to determine the isolator

selection type and deflection required for each piece of mechanical equipment. Conform to the

requirements of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning




Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook, “HVAC Systems and Applications”, Chapter 52, “Sound

and Vibration Control”

D. Isolators of the same type shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Mason Industries

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

3. Kinetics Noise Control.

4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads : Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad

area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that

match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant neoprene isolator elements with

factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to

structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and

attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-

bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

a. Maximum Durometer: 70.

D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element

and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-

bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.




6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw

to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to

weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, neoprene or

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting

and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment.







G. Horizontal Thrust Restraints: Modified Spring Isolator, with rod and angle brackets.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

2. Maximum Movement: ¼-inch from stop to maximum thrust.



4. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to ¼-inch- thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside, with integral neoprene bushing and

precompression stop nut.

5. End Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded end plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw.

6. Deflection: Match spring isolators.

H. Elastomeric Hangers Double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric

isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-

code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

2. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

3. Maximum Durometer: 70.

I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert

in compression.













6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert

hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.










6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit

stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load

on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible,

a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and

contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection

of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

M. Resilient Washer-Bushings: Molded, oil resistant bridge bearing neoprene.

N. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of

cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide

bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.




4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors

in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported

equipment manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or

drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to

installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole

and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air

pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

B. Align vibration isolators squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment.

C. For equipment with bases, locate isolators on the sides of the base that are parallel to the

equipment shaft.

D. Position vibration isolation hangers as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly but not in

contact with the building structure. Provide 1-inch minimum clearance between hanger housing

and structure above. Provide side clearance for hanger housings to allow a full 360-degree

rotation about the rod axis without contacting any object.




E. Parallel pipes may be hung together on a trapeze that is isolated from the structure. Isolator

deflections must equal the greatest deflection for those pipes if isolated individually. Do not mix

isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same trapeze.

F. Do not hang or support piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment on other equipment,

pipes or ductwork installed on vibration isolators. Maintain 2-inch clearance between isolated

equipment and walls, ceilings and other equipment. Do not allow drain piping connected to

vibration-isolated equipment to contact the building structure or other non-isolated systems

unless it is resiliently mounted.

G. Flexible Ductwork Connectors: Provide flexible ductwork connectors in ductwork at the point

where it is connected to externally isolated, exhaust fans, or any other vibration-isolated

equipment. Install these connectors between the equipment and the first associated duct support

or hanger.

H. Flexible Piping Connectors: Provide flexible piping connectors in piping where it is connected

to vibration-isolated equipment. Install these connectors between the equipment and the first

associated pipe support or hanger, except where supports connect to an inertia base common to

the equipment.

I. The installation or use of vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of piping

which will result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In

order to meet this objective, maintain equipment and piping in a rigid position during

installation. Do not transfer the load to the isolators until the installation is complete and under

full operational load.


A. Testing Agency: Engage the isolator manufacturer or their authorized representative to perform

tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Test equipment isolators and first four associated vibration isolation hangers from each

equipment connection.

4. Inspect vibration control devices and remove paint splatters, spots, dirt, and debris.

5. Vibration testing is specified in Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC.”

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.




B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators so that isolated equipment is level and in proper

alignment with connecting ducts and pipes.

D. Attach thrust restraints at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of ¼-inch movement

during start and stop.

E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.




3.5 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE

ITEM DESCRIPTION ISOLATOR AND BASE TYPE

MIN. STATIC DEFLECTION

(INCHES)

Slab On

Grade

Floor

Span

PIPING

First three supports near

equipment isolated with springs

Spring Hangers with Vertical

Limit Stops (suspended);

Restrained Spring Isolators (floor

mounted)

(Note 3) (Note 3)

First three supports near

equipment isolated with pads and

mounts, and non-isolated

equipment

Elastomeric Hangers

(suspended); Isolation Mounts

(floor mounted)

0.35 0.35

Generally, after first three

supports, within 50 feet of

isolated equipment

Elastomeric Hangers


(floor mounted)

0.35 0.35

Pipe Risers and Guides within 50

feet of isolated equipment

Pipe Riser Resilient Support and

Resilient Pipe Guides

-- 0.35

Connections to isolated

equipment, NPS 2 and larger,

generally

Single or Multiple Sphere

Flexible Connectors

-- --

DUCTWORK

First two supports near

equipment isolated with springs

Spring Hangers (suspended);

Spring Isolators (floor mounted)

(Note 3) (Note 3)

First two supports near

equipment isolated with pads and

mounts and non-isolated

equipment

Elastomeric Hangers


(floor mounted)

0.35 0.35

After first two supports, within

50 feet of isolated equipment

Elastomeric Hangers


(floor mounted)

0.35 0.35

Connections to externally

isolated equipment

Flexible Duct Connectors and

Horizontal thrust Restraints

(Note 3) (Note 3)

Connections to internally isolated

equipment without integral

flexible duct connectors

Flexible Duct Connectors and

Horizontal thrust Restraints

(Note 3) (Note 3)




FANS

Within factory fabricated air-

handling units

Spring Isolators, Horizontal

Thrust Restraints, and Inertia

Base

-- (Note 1)

FAN RPM SCHEDULE

Up to 300 RPM -- 2.5 3.5

301-500 RPM -- 1.5 2.5

501 RPM and above -- 1.0 1.5

CONDENSING UNITS

Wall Mount Pad .25 .25

NOTES:

1. Refer to Fan RPM Schedule for minimum static deflection. Select deflection based on minimum

speed (rpm) anticipated for fans with variable frequency controllers or multi-speed motors.

2. The spring hangers shall carry vertical load; the restrained spring isolators provide lateral

support only.

3. Static deflection equal to the isolators supporting the equipment.




Identification For HVAC Equipment 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553-IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment Labels.

2. Pipe labels

3. Duct Labels.

4. Stencils

5. Warning Tags

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Brady Corporation.

2. Marking Services, Inc.

3. Seton Identification Products.

2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Data:

a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.

b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.

c. Labels of tested compliances.




2. Location: Accessible and visible.

3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

4. Material and Thickness: anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having

predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel moly-rivets.

8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-adhesive

backing.

D. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,

permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: ¾ inch

minimum.

2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2

inches minimum.

2.4 DUCT LABELS

A. Stenciled Duct Label: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided

instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high

is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required

identification.

B. Located markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals

of 15 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter

height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and and

similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.




2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint

may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless


2.6 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with a minimum of 1/4-inch letters for piping system

abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide

5/32-inch hole for fastener.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch

2. Material: 3/32-inch- thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer.

3. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain.

2.7 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical

equipment. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible.

B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on each major item of mechanical

equipment.

1. Letter Size: Minimum ¼ inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for

greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size

of principal lettering.

2. Locate markers where accessible and visible.

3.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow

indication arrows showing direction of flow.




1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. Use

size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (Contractor’s Option): Self-

adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least ¾ inch wide,

lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference

of pipe.

3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size

to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger (Contractor’s Option): Self-

wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full

circumference of pipe.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; accessible

maintenance spaces such as shafts and plenums as follows:

1. Near each valve and control devices.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 15 feet along each run.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.

3.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install stenciled markers on ductwork:

1. Stenciled Duct Marker: Stenciled markers, showing designation of equipment serving

ducts (AHU-1, etc.), service (supply-air, etc.) and direction of flow.

B. Located markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals

of 15 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.4 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.

3.5 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.




3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by

other work.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.




Testing, Adjusting and Balancing For HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.

3. Vibration measuring.

4. Sound level measuring.

5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

6. Witness duct leakage testing.

7. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate flow rate and air patterns at the equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or

adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and

terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and

ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,

and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high

air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn

from a person’s skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.

G. RC: Room criteria.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

I. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause

reduced capacities in all or part of a system.




J. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a

fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was

performance tested.

K. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the

distribution system.

L. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

N. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

O. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

P. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on

approved forms certified by TAB firm.




B. Certified TAB Reports: Copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved

forms certified by TAB firm.

C. Warranties specified in this Section.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Engineer on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan

to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team

members, equipment manufacturers’ authorized service representatives, HVAC controls

installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled

meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. The Contract Documents examination report.

c. The TAB plan.

d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.

e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.




C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the

following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and

Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems”, NEBB’s “Procedural

Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems”, or SMACNA’s

“HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.”

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy: As described in AABC’s “National Standards for

Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB’s

“Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,”

Section II, “Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification.”

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently

if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicated date of calibration and the

name of party performing instrument calibration.


A. Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

C. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to

support and assist TAB activities.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide one of the following:

1. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC’s “National

Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning

Systems” forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract




Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee

includes the following provisions:

a. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract

Documents.

b. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and

installation limits.

2. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in

completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the

Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:

a. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract

Documents.

b. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and

installation limits.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of

Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume

dampers, required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of

these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for

efficient system and equipment operation. Advise the Contractor of additional dampers

required in the ductwork, etc., to effectively and properly balance the systems. These

devices shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Examine approved submittal data for HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section “Project Record

Documents.”

D. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data

to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or

unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system

effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under

conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the

factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,

“Fans and Systems,” Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA’s “HVAC Systems—Duct

Design,” Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

E. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.




F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that they are complete and that testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports for each system and equipment.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installation and verify that indicated balancing devices,

such as balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and

that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient

system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and

balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,

belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine units to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and

functioning.

L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.

3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed

and fully open positions.

4. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and

cold walls.

5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.

6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.

7. Controller set points are set at indicated values.

8. Interlocked systems are operating.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance dampers are open.

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.




3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air

Conditioning Systems", NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

of Environmental Systems”, or SMACNA’s “HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing”; and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and

balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.

Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices settings with paint or other suitable, permanent

identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-

control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the

supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all air devices is more than the indicated

airflow of the fan, place a selected number of air devices at a maximum set-point airflow




condition until the total airflow of the air devices equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select

the reduced airflow air devices so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been

adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position

that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.

3. Set units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed

maximum airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream.

4. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

a. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and

adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

1) Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-

tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets

and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

b. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue

to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified

tolerances.

5. Measure outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

a. Measure outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

6. Adjust outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the

dampers at air terminals.

a. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of

indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations

prescribed by the Contract Documents.

b. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

7. Set units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed

minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described

for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave

outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

8. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets.

9. Measure static pressure and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air

sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained.

10. Record the final fan-performance data.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering and leaving air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.




3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller (if provided) to prove

proper operation. Record observations, including name of controller manufacturer, model

number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.8 PROEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic

temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive

eight-hour days, in five separately controlled zones of each of the following space types to

prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

1. Military Gym.

2. Overflow Readiness Area.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS

A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.

2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second.

3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils.

4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.

5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.

B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.

2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer’s calibration procedures.

C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a

minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.

1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.

2. Clear the space of people.




D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is

complete.

E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.

F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer’s written instructions and to avoid

interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.

G. Measure and record vibration on rotation equipment over 3 hp.

H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing, equipment base vibration, and building

structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, vertical, and

axial planes.

1. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:

a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.

d. Equipment Base: Top and side.

e. Building: Floor.

f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation

blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the

differences.

J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.

2. Verify that installation is level and plumb.

3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored.

4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel-

to-solid distance.

5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base

below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia base

and the floor.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS

A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying with

ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters. Comply with

requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound

meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.

C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air

velocities exceed 100 fpm, use a windscreen on the microphone.

D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete.




E. Close windows and doors to the space.

F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from

other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.

G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured.

Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-sight between the

sound source and the sound-level meter.

H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches above the floor and at least 36

inches from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the measurements.

I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the

frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.

J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels

and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.

1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on

the difference and adjust measurements.

K. Perform sound testing at 5 locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each

space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing

multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one

location that is remote from the predominant sound source. Test sound levels after all phases of

project are complete. Coordinate with Owner for selection of spaces to be tested.

1. Each space with a noise criterion of RC or NC 25 or lower.

2. Each space with an indicated noise criterion of RC or NC 35 and lower that is adjacent to

a mechanical/equipment room or pad mounted equipment.

3.11 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Witness leakage tests of ductwork. Duct leakage tests are specified in Division 23 Section

“Metal Ducts.”

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

B. Set fan bearing vibration within the following tolerances:

Fan RPM

(peak to peak)

Mils

(peak to peak)

Under 600 4.0

600-800 3.0

801-1200 2.3




1201-2000 2.0

Over 2000 1.0

3.13 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and

balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each

building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.14 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into separate sections by tested systems and balanced

systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and

balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Fan curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings

and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the

final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB firm.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Engineer's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:




a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems. Present each system

with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

4. Balancing stations.

5. Position of balancing devices.

F. Round and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the

duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft..

g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

G. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, and air-cooled

condensing units include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Unit make and model number.

d. Compressor make.

e. Compressor model and serial numbers.

f. Refrigerant weight in lb.

g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual):

a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.

c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.

d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.

e. Control settings.




f. Unloader set points.

g. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig.

h. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig.

i. Suction pressure in psig.

j. Suction temperature in deg F.

k. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig.

l. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F.

m. Oil pressure in psig.

n. Oil temperature in deg F.

o. Voltage at each connection.

p. Amperage for each phase.

q. Kilowatt input.

r. Crankcase heater kilowatt.

s. Number of fans.

t. Condenser fan rpm.

u. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm.

v. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.

w. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.

x. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

H. Vibration Measurement Reports:

1. Date and time of test.

2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.

3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower.

4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.

5. Measurement readings for each measurement location.

6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.

7. Description of predominant vibration source.

I. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms

and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for both

“background” and “HVAC system operating” readings. Record each tested location on a

separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:

1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve.

2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.

3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number.

4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location.

5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.

6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal.

7. Description of predominant sound source.

J. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.




3.15 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.

c. Measure sound levels at two locations.

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing

and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a

final inspection be made by Engineer.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of

Engineer.

3. Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be

rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour

business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final

report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report

and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall

contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in

accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the

final payment.

3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




HVAC Insulation 230700 - 1

SECTION 230700-HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct, including the following:

1. Insulation Materials

2. Adhesives.

3. Exterior Duct and Insulation

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FSK: Foil, scrim, Kraft paper.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTAL

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Provide certified calculations showing the K factor for insulation thickness.




B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include

dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.




B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, with appropriate markings of applicable testing

and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation materials shall be tested and rated according to ASTM Test Method C-177 to

determine k-factors.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

B. Protect all insulating materials from dirt, water and damage during storage and installation.

Remove damaged, wet or otherwise unsatisfactory insulation at Architect’s direction.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct

Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain

clearance requirements for installation of insulation and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating

materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.




A. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas, Type 814.

c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

2. Maximum K-Factor: 0.23 at 75 deg. F. mean temperature.

3. Minimum Density: 3.0 pounds per cubic foot.

4. Paint Board Insulation color selected by DGS representative. Accessories shall match

color.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Products, CP-82/CP-127.

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20/85-60.

c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.

d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.




2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Childers Products, CP-76.

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.

c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.

4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F .

5. Color: Aluminum.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 EXTERIOR DUCT AND EXTERIOR INSULATION

A. Submittals

1. Product data: For each type of product indicated.

2. Shop drawings: including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to

other work including.

a. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.

b. Elevation of ducts.

c. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

d. Fittings.

e. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

f. Location of internal and external duct components such as dampers, smoke

detectors, alarms, etc.

3. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale showing coordination of general

construction, building components, and other building services.

B. Quality Assurance

1. Installer Qualifications:

a. Dual-Tech® can be installed by competent trained field mechanics who

demonstrate competence in the HVAC industry and have been trained by




manufacturer or a certified manufacturer sub-distributor on proper installation of

Dual-Tech®.

C. Specification Compliance

1. Duct Leakage Class, follow SMACNA Leakage Class 3 or less.

2. Dual-Tech® shall incorporate a Kingspan KoolDuct® fortified inner liner compliant to

UL (C-UL) 181 Standard for Safety Listed, Class 1 system, with included testing and

passing the following:

a. Test for Surface Burning Characteristics

b. Flame Penetration Test

c. Burning Test

d. Mold Growth and Humidity Test

e. Low Temperature Test and High Temperature Test

f. Puncture Test

g. Static Load Test

h. Impact Test

i. Pressure Test and Collapse (negative pressure) Test

j. High Temperature and Humidity for 90 days

k. Cone Calorimeter

l. ASTM E2257 Standard Test Method for Room Fire Test of Wall and Ceiling

Materials and Assemblies

m. ASTM E 84 tested, Tunnel Test, does not exceed 25 flame spread, 50 smoke

n. developed.

o. DW144, Class B

p. NRTL product approval, (Subpart S of 29 CFR Part 1910, OSHA)

q. ASTM C 423 noise reduction

r. ASTM C 423 noise reduction

s. ASTM E 96/E 96M Procedure A for permeability

t. ASTM C 1071 for erosion

u. ASTM C 518: 2004, Standard Test Method for Steady–State Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

v. UL 723, Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

w. NFPA Compliance:

1) NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems"

2) NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems"

3) NFPA 255, “Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials

3. Dual-Tech® outer shell shall be COOLR KYNAR 500® finished .032” thickness

aluminum architectural sheet metal. Color shall be selected by architect.

a. Aluminum standards:

1) ASTM B 209

2) 3105-H24 alloy and temper

b. KYNAR Painted Finish Standards:

1) ASTM D 968, Method A – Abrasion / Falling Sand

2) ASTM D 4587 & ASTM G 154 – Accelerated Weathering

3) ASTM D 3359, Method B – Adhesion of Coating by Tape Test

4) ASTM D 1308 – Chemical Pollution

5) ASTM B 117 – Salt Spray

6) ASTM D 5894 – Cyclic Salt Fog UV




7) ASTM G 7 – Exterior Durability

8) ASTM D 4145 – Flexibility T-Bend

9) ASTM D 522 – Formability

10) ASTM D 4585 – Humidity, Cleveland Condensing

11) ASTM D 2247 – Humidity

12) ASTM D 2794 – Impact Resistance

13) ASTM D 3363 – Pencil Hardness

14) ASTM D 523 – Specular Gloss

15) ASTM E 84 – Surface Burning

16) ASTM D 1735 – Water Resistance of Coating using Fog Apparatus

17) ASTM D 822, G152 & G153 – Weatherometer

D. Product Delivery and Storage

1. Prevent objectionable aesthetic damage to the outer surface of duct segments during

transport and storage.

2. Store duct segments under cover and protect from excessive moisture prior to installation.

E. Dual-Tech® Rectangular Duct and Fittings

1. The panel shall be manufactured of CFC-free Kingspan Kooltherm® closed cell rigid

thermoset resin thermally bonded on both sides to a factory applied .001" aluminum foil

facing reinforced with a fiberglass scrim. The thermal conductivity shall be no greater

than 0.13BTU • in/Hr •ft2•°F.

2. The density of the Kooltherm® foam shall not be less than 3.5 pcf with a minimum

compressive strength of 28 psi.

3. The standard assembly is a double layer of R-8.1 at 1 3/16” panel with a total thickness of

2 3/8” at R-16.2 thermal rating shall be utilized unless indicated otherwise.

a. Internal Air Temperature: -15°F to +185°F during continuous operation.

b. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.146 Btu·in/ft2·hr·°F at 50-74°F Mean (ASTM

C 518).

4. Permeability: 0.00 perms maximum when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M,

Procedure A.

5. Antimicrobial Agent: Additive for antimicrobial shall not be used but instead, raw product

must pass UL bacteria growth testing.

6. Noise-Reduction Coefficient: 0.05 minimum when tested according to ASTM C 423,

Mounting A.

7. Required Markings: All interior duct liner shall bear UL label and other markings required

by UL 181 on each full sheet of duct panel; UL ratings for internal closure materials.

8. All insulation materials shall be closed cell with a closed cell content of >90%.

9. Air stream Duct Construction:

a. Ductwork to be fabricated per SMACNA’s 2015 “Phenolic Duct Construction

Standards” in combination with Kingspan Insulation certified fabrication

standards.

b. Duct Connections.

1) Factory Manufactured all Aluminum Grip Flange.

a) Grip flange

b) F-flange

c) H-flange

d) U-flange

2) All flanged connections shall have a continuous strip of Kingspan foam

gasket material as per installation guidelines.




3) Joint connection to be aluminum grip flange system standard.

10. Weathertight Triple Seal Joint System

a. Joint seal system to be installed per manufacturer installation guidelines in a

watershed fashion.

1) Joint system shall be comprised of the following components.

a) Insulation filler piece field cut to length.

b) 6” Wide beaded flashing enclosure field cut the length.

c) ¾” x 1/8” Butyl Gasket to be installed on 6” beaded flashing closure

on full lengths parallel to bead.

d) #10 304 Stainless Steel self-tapping screws with weather seal washers

installed on 6” centers. Screw placement to be per manufacturer

installation manual.

e) RTV Silicone Sealant to be used on all circumferential and vertical

seams.

f) All joint seal system components shall be colored to match chosen

primary duct jacket color.

11. Outdoor Cladding

a. Dual-Tech® outer shell shall be COOLR KYNAR 500® finished or approved

equal .032” thickness aluminum architectural sheet metal. Standard color to be

“Regal White” or otherwise specified herein. Color selected by DGS

representative.

12. Weight

a. Dual-Tech® shall provide low weight stresses on the building framing and support

members. Assembled Dual-Tech® shall have a standard weight of 2 lbs. per square

foot per R-16 value.

13. Manufacturer: PTM Manufacturing, LLC or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.




3.3 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including

fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system

schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

K. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at anchors

and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.




O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. Replace insulation on ductwork and equipment where insulation is damaged during construction

or removed for testing and balancing work.

Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least

2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper

sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping

and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 EXTERIOR DUCT AND INSULATION

A. Shop Fabrication

1. Certification:

a. Ducts shall be detailed and fully factory manufactured by an authorized

DualTech® manufacturing facility.

2. Fabrication:

a. Fabricated joints, seams, transitions, reinforcement, elbows, branch connections,

access doors and panels, along with any damage repairs must be in accordance to

manufacturer’s written and detailed instructions in combination with SMACNA’s




2015 Phenolic Duct Construction Standards, Kingspan Insulation’s certified

fabrication standards, and manufacturer patented Dual-Tech® construction

methods.

b. Both positive and negative ductwork and fittings shall be constructed to

incorporate a UL Listed as a Class 1 air duct to Standard for Safety UL 181 liner

with an exterior cladding for permanent protection against water intrusion.

B. Dual-Tech® Installation

1. Dual-Tech® can be installed by competent trained field mechanics who demonstrate

competence in the HVAC industry and have been Trained by manufacturer or a certified

manufacturer sub-distributor and has received a certificate of competency from

manufacturer.

2. Prior to Installation

a. Protect duct interiors from the moisture, construction debris and dust, and other

foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New

Construction Guidelines."

b. Predetermine duct layout as per supplied duct layout details by manufacturer

Manufacturing, LLC.

c. Duct orientation shall be strictly adhered to in order to maintain weathertight

installation.

3. During installation

a. A strippable film may be pre-installed to protect the finished surface during

shipping, handling, and fabrication. This protective film shall be removed

immediately after duct segment installation, and prior to Triple Seal Joint Flashing

installation.

C. Hanger And Support Installation

1. Contractor to ensure that the ductwork system is properly and adequately supported as per

SMACNA’s Latest Edition of Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

2. Supports on straight runs of ductwork shall be positioned at centers not exceeding 10 feet

for duct sections when fabricated in 10’ 2-1/2” lengths with duct girth less than 39” I.D.

Larger duct sizes and short segments with duct girth greater than 39” I.D. are to be

supported at 8 foot centers or less, in accordance with SMACNA’s Latest Edition of Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

3. Ductwork shall be supported at changes of direction, at branch duct connections, tee

fittings, parallel under turning vanes and all duct accessories such as dampers, etc.

4. The load of such accessories to the ductwork shall be neutralized by the accessory

support.

a. At no time should the exterior jacket be penetrated other then as detailed in

manufacturer’s Installation manual.

D. Field Quality Control

a. Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect completed

installation and provide written report that installation complies with

manufacturer's written instructions.

1) Remove, replace, or repair duct system where inspection indicates that it

does not comply with specified requirements.

b. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense, to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.




E. Duct Schedule

1. Outdoor Ducts and Fittings:

a. Dual-Tech® Rectangular Ducts and Fittings:

1) Minimum Panel Thickness: R-16.2 / 2-3/8”

2) Cladding: Dual-Tech® outer shell shall be COOLR KYNAR 500® finished

.032” thickness aluminum architectural sheet metal. Color selected by DGS

representative.

3.6 DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.

Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier

mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the

insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and




inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable insulation materials, thicknesses and vapor retarder requirements are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range.

B. Where metal ducts are specified to have internal duct liner, the thickness of the external

insulation may NOT be reduced.

C. Provide removable, replaceable insulation plugs at manufacturer’s equipment identification

plates.

D. Ductwork that is internally lined is required to be insulated externally as indicated herein.

SERVICE INSULATION

MATERIAL

INSULATION

THICKNESS

VAPOR RETARDER

REQUIRED

METAL SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTS

Indoor Duty (not Double Wall Spiral Duct):

Exposed, Generally Mineral-Fiber Board 1-1/2” Yes




Building Management System 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900-BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 BMS DESCRIPTION

A. The work of the single BMS contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all

Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings

and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.

B. The BMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software,

software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing,

installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing,

commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling,

administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and

patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in

these Division documents which are required for the complete and fully functional BMS.

C. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer employees who

are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software, standards

and configurations to be provided for this Project.

D. Manage and coordinate the BMS work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project

schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not impede or delay the

work of associated trades.

E. Provide multiple panels as required to implement the sequences of operations and provide

required controls points. Extend power wiring to panels from nearest 120 volt panel with suitable

spare breakers.

F. Alarms shall be in plain English and clearly describe the alarm condition to an operator with no

BMS system training. For example, the alarm for RTU fan failure shall be “RTU FAN

FAILURE”. Numerical or cryptic code alarms are not acceptable. For example, error messages

such as “CRIT 4 ALARM” or “ERROR 12” are not acceptable.

G. All setpoints, timers, deadbands, PID gains, etc., listed in sequences shall be capable of

adjustment by the operator through the normal BMS system whether indicated in sequences or

not. Software (Virtual) points shall be used for these variables. Fixed scalar numbers shall not

be embedded in programs except for physical constants (I.E. Conversion Factors).

H. Values for all points, including real (Hardware) points used in control sequences shall be capable

of being overridden by the operator (I.E., for testing and commissioning). If hardware design




prevents this for hardware points, they shall be equated to a software point and the software point

shall be used in all sequences. Exception: Not required for all application specific controller

hardwire points unless noted otherwise.

I. VFD minimum speed setpoints shall be stored as a positive percentage of full range. I.E, 0%

speed shall equate to fully stopped equipment, and the minimum speed shall be a value greater

than 0%.


A. General

1. The Building Management System architecture shall consist of the products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Building Management Systems, and

shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard of design at the time of bid.

B. Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System Manufacturer.

2. Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer’s control system

training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of completed training including course

outlines.

1.4 Codes and Standards

A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of local, state, and federal

authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the installation

shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to the receipt of bids of the following

codes:

1. National Electric Code (NEC)

2. International Building Code (IBC)

3. International Mechanical Code (IMC)

4. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation and Control Systems

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples

1. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall only

reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as approved by

the Architect and Engineer for Contract compliance.

2. Allow 20 working days for the review of each package by the Engineer in the scheduling

of the total BMS work.

3. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such

regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BMS contractor where

filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.

4. Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall

include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item

description.




5. The BMS contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the first review.

1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Provide PDF for engineer (and owner if they do not accept residing on BMS Server) the

Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Operation and Maintenance shall reside on BMS

server if accepted by owner upon completion of the project. In addition the entire

Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and

include the following for the BMS provided:

a. Table of contents.

b. As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record

drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system and incorporate all

information supplied with the approved submittal.

c. Manufacturers product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including

software.

d. System Operator’s manuals.

e. Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences.

f. BMS network diagrams.

g. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.

2. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all

necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized table

of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets. Viewer

software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:

1. Provide a two-year labor and material warranty on the BMS.

2. If within twenty four (24) months from the date of substantial completion, upon written

notice from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials,

it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BMS Pre-selected contractor

at the cost of the BMS Pre-selected contractor.

1.8 PLANNED MAINTENANCE

A. Provide quarterly visits through the warranty period to inspect the operation of the controls

system.

1.9 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of

a binary object and device reaction.

2. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units within

six seconds.




3. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm within 45 seconds. .

4. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but

selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

5. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan

and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

6. Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed

in Table 1.

7. Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint

within tolerances listed in Table 2.

Table-1

Reporting Accuracy

Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Ducted Air ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)

Outside Air ±1.0ºC (±2ºF)

Dew Point ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Delta-T ±0.15º (±0.25ºF)

Relative Humidity ±5% RH

Airflow (terminal) ±10% of full scale (see Note 1)

Airflow (measuring stations) ±5% of full scale

Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±3% of full scale

Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)

Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ±50 ppm

Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10%–100% of scale

Table 2

Control Stability and Accuracy

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure ±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.)

±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)

0–1.5 kPa (0–6 in. w.g.)

-25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)

Airflow ±10% of full scale

Space Temperature ±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)

Duct Temperature ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)

Humidity ±5% RH

1.10 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. Project-specific software and documentation shall become Owner's property. This includes, but

is not limited to:

1. Graphics

2. Record drawings

3. Database

4. Application programming code

5. Documentation




1.11 DEFINITIONS

Term Definition

BACnet Interoperability

Building Blocks (BIBB)

A BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is

needed to perform a particular task. BIBBS are combined to build

the BACnet functional requirements for a device in a specification.

BACnet/BACnet Standard BACnet communication requirements as defined by the latest

version of ASHRAE/ANSI 135 and approved addenda.

Controller Intelligent stand-alone control device. Controller is a generic

reference to building controllers, custom application controllers, and

application specific controllers.

Direct Digital Control Microprocessor-based control including Analog/Digital conversion

and program logic.

Gateway Bi-directional protocol translator connecting control systems that use

different communication protocols.

Local Area Network Control system communications network limited to local building.

Master-Slave/Token Passing Data link protocol as defined by the BACnet standard.

Point-to-Point Serial communication as defined in the BACnet standard.

Primary Controlling LAN High speed, peer-to-peer controller LAN connecting BCs and

optionally AACs and ASCs. Refer to System Architecture below.

Protocol Implementation

Conformance Statement

A written document that identifies the particular options specified by

BACnet that are implemented in a device.

Router A device that connects two or more networks at the network layer.

Wiring Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.

1.12 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE

A. Motorized Control Dampers:

1. Dampers shall have a maximum leakage of six (6) cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square

foot (sq. ft.) of damper area at four (4) inches of water column (IWC) or three (3) cfm/sq.

ft. at one (1) IWC; maximum differential pressure rating of six (6) IWC; maximum velocity

rating of six-thousand (6000) feet per minute (fpm).

2. Damper frame shall be aluminum, formed into a five (5) inch by one (1) inch structural hat

channel. Top and bottom frame members on dampers less than seventeen (17) inches high

shall be low profile design to maximize the free area smaller dampers. Frame shall be four

(4) piece construction with one-and-one-half (1-1/2) inch, minimum, integral overlapping

gusset reinforcements in each corner to assure square corners and provide maximum

resistance to racking. Damper blades shall be heavy gauge extruded aluminum airfoil shape

with metal blade to blade overlap. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot

point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction

through the damper. Provide symmetrical blades of varying size as required to completely

fill the damper opening.

3. Blade Stops: Each blade stop (at top and bottom of damper frame) shall occupy no more

than 1/2 inch of the damper opening area to allow for maximum free area and to minimize

pressure loss across the damper.




4. Blade seals shall be silicone permanently bonded to the appropriate blade edges. Jamb

seals shall be flexible stainless steel compression type. Linkage shall be stainless steel and

concealed in the jamb. Axles shall be minimum 1/2 inch diameter stainless steel. Bearings

shall be stainless steel sleeve rotating in polished extruded holes in the damper frame.

5. Dampers used in modulating applications shall be opposed blade type, dampers used in

two-position applications shall be parallel blade type.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by

Greenheck Fan Corporation, Model No. VDC-43, or OR approved equal.

B. Damper Actuators, General: Provide a minimum of seven (7) inch/pounds of torque per square

foot of damper area. Size actuators to operate at no more than eighty (80) percent of its rated

torque value.

1. Electric Damper Actuators:

a. Brushless DC motor with stall protection.

b. Adjustable offset and span.

c. Adjustable mechanical stops.

d. Visible position indication.

e. Manual override. If a special tool is required for manual override positioning,

provide one tool for each actuator and permanently attach it with a chain at each

actuator location.

f. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

by BELIMO Aircontrols USA, Inc., LF / AF Series, or OR approved equal.

C. Temperature and Humidity Sensors:

1. Combination Temperature and Humidity Sensors with Remote Probe: Sensors shall be

combination temperature and humidity sensing devices with the characteristics and

accuracies noted below. Probe type sensors shall be installed within the wall cavities with

approximately one (1) inch of the probe length protruding into the space. Probe tips shall

be capable of being painted without adversely affecting the sensor operation or accuracy.

Humidity sensing elements shall be installed within the probe body for ease of replacement.

a. Humidity: Plus/minus two (2) percent of reading (including repeatability, hysteresis

and non-linearity error); interchangeable capacitance sensor.

b. Temperature: Ten-thousand (10000) ohm Type II Thermistor with plus/minus 0.2

percent accuracy.

c. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

by ASI Industries, or OR approved equal.

2. Air Handling Unit Return Air Combination Temperature and Humidity Sensor:

a. Humidity sensor: Field replaceable capacitive humidity sensing element, 1%

accuracy, +/- 1% stability (two years), five point NIST factory calibration.

b. Temperature: Ten-thousand (10000) ohm Type II Thermistor with plus/minus 0.2

percent accuracy.

c. 1 year manufacturer warranty.

d. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

by ASI Industries or OR approved equal.

3. Averaging / Single Point Duct Temperature Sensors: 10K Thermistor Sensor, +/- .36°F

accuracy; +/- .23°F stability, bendable copper sensing element (averaging sensors).

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

by ASI Industries or OR approved equal.




4. Wall Mounted Room Thermostats- Thermistor 10K ohm at seventy-seven (77) degrees F,

plus/minus 0.36 degrees F accuracy; port for connection of a portable operator’s terminal.

Provide sensors without manufacturer’s logo.

D. Pressure Transmitters (Air): Air pressure sensing devices shall have an accuracy of plus/minus

one (1) percent full scale. Provide devices with jumper selectable ranges and 24VAC power

supply.

1. One-hundred (100) percent solid state, glass-on-silicon capacitance sensor.

2. Up to ten (10) PSID overpressure without zero shift.

3. Four (4) to twenty (20) mA temperature compensated output.

4. Non-interacting zero and span adjustment.

5. NIST traceable calibration.

6. Short circuit and reverse polarity protected.

7. NEMA 4 enclosure.


ASI Industries, or OR approved equal.

E. Differential Pressure Switch (Air): Visual setpoint adjustment, one (1) SPDT switch rated for

15A at 120 to 480VAC; repeatability plus/minus one (1) percent.


Dwyer Instruments, Inc., Model No. 1630 Series, or OR approved equal.

F. Freezestat: Two (2) SPST contacts (one NO, one NC) rated for 8A at 120VAC; twenty (20) foot

capillary sensing tube; external temperature scale and set point adjustment; manual reset; Range

fifteen (15) to fifty-five (55) degrees F. Provide necessary number of devices for one (1) foot of

capillary sensing tube coverage per linear foot of coil area. Support capillary tubes with factory

fabricated brass capillary tube clips.

G. Damper Blade Position Switch: Provide blade-mounted damper position monitoring switch that

positively indicates the open/closed position of the damper. These switches are in addition to any

position indicating device that may be integral to the damper actuator.

1. Switch Type: Side Rotary with 1.5" to 3.5" Adjustable Length Lever; Nylon Roller.

2. 1NC, 1NO SPDT Snap Action, Double-Break Switch, 10A Inductive @ 120VAC.

3. NEMA 4 Enclosure.

4. Operating Temperature Range: -20 °F to 160 °F.


Honeywell Model Inc., Model No. 1LS3, or OR approved equal.

H. Current Sensing Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current

level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point (1-135A).

Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level

below trip set point. Output rating 1.0A at 30V AC/DC. Current sensors used to detect status of

variable frequency motors shall automatically compensate for effects of frequency and amperage

changes associated with variable speed motors and distinguish between normal drops due to

system operation and drops caused by mechanical failure.


ASI Industries, or OR approved equal.

I. Control Relays: DPDT with LED indication when energized; multi-voltage coil; On-Off-Auto

switch; contacts rated for 10A at 120VAC; Relays rated for ten (10) million mechanical cycles.




J. Control Panels: Furnish NEMA 1 temperature control panels with locking doors. Construction

shall be fourteen (14) gauge steel as a minimum, color shall be gray. Provide data pocket for

placement of wiring schematics. All controllers and devices within the panel shall be mounted

on a removable back plane. All wiring shall be connected to numbered terminal strips mounted

within the panel. Terminal blocks shall be spring-clamp compression connection type; screw

terminals are prohibited. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates identifying all devices mounted

on the interior of control panels. A complete set of “as-built” wiring diagrams shall be installed

within each control panel. Panels shall not be mounted on air handling unit casing or any

equipment subject to vibration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The BMS system shall be a Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. System shall be able to be

expendable to add additional points in the future.

B. The complete system shall be warranted for a period of two (2) years from the date of

substantial completion.

C. A Comprehensive test, evaluation, training and follow- up program shall be specified by the

engineer to ensure that the system operates as designed over the life of the system during

warranty period and beyond.

D. All software updates available for the BMS system during the warranty period shall be installed

and tested to ensure proper operation at no extra cost to Owner.

E. The BMS system in all schools shall be open protocol BACNET.

F. All software and hardware shall be licensed to DGS/Owner.

G. All software, hardware, and training must be able to be purchased from several vendors. Branch

only purchases will not be accepted.

H. DGS/Owner shall have the ability to be self-sufficient with the regards to installation and

programming of al software and hardware.

I. Each DDC controller shall communicate over a BACnet communications bus installed between

the controllers by the BMS contractor. A communications master control panel shall be

provided by the BMS contractor.

J. Within 10 working days of Contract Award a meeting shall be scheduled with DGS, the General

contractor, the BMS contractor, the Equipment Manufacturer, and the Commissioning Agent

where applicable. The purpose of the meeting will be to develop the sequences, points lists, and

interfaces necessary to reduce the number of issues.




K. All controllers, sensors, and switches shall be hard-wired. All connections between the main

BMS panel and sub-panels/controllers shall be hard-wired. Wiring shall be installed in

accordance with Building and Electrical codes as well as any other applicable codes.

L. All equipment shall have a RIB switch relay override for service and trouble shooting.

M. Sensors, not thermostats, shall be used to read temperature in spaces and shall have a range of

0F TO 120F.

N. All equipment shall be controlled by a stand-alone DDC controller. These controllers shall be

provided and field installed by the BMS contractor. The BMS system shall only enable these

pieces of equipment which are expected to run ‘stand-alone’. Factory controllers will not be

acceptable.

O. Zone

1. Should adjoining zones be connected by a movable partition, particular care shall be taken

to preclude short cycling when the partition is open.

2. The four basic schemes of zone control shall be:

a. Occupied Heating

b. Occupied Cooling

c. Unoccupied Heating

d. Unoccupied Cooling

3. HVAC systems and variable occupancy shall incorporate return air CO2 sensors which

shall during the occupied mode, modulate the outside air damper(s) to maintain air

quality in accordance with the latest version of ASHRAE standard 62. These sensors

shall be self testing i.e. upon failure of a sensor, the outside air damper(s) shall move to

the position which provides the required air without reference to the CO2 contents of the

ventilated space. The DDC system shall have the capability to over-ride-this sensor and

to provide the required outside air inside without reference to CO2 contents of the

ventilated space.

P. Temperatures and Set Points:

1. All set points shall be fully adjustable and meet the following guidelines:

a. Occupied Cooling: Set point 76F to maintain space temperatures no higher

than 78F

b. Unoccupied Cooling: Set Point 85F

Q. Graphics

1. All proposed graphics shall be provided as submittals for review and approval prior to

installation.

2. The home screen shall include links to the Mechanical and Controls drawings and

Balancing Reports.

PART 3 – PERFORMANCE / EXECUTION

A. Installation Practices




1. BMS Wiring

a. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation

of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the

BMS Pre-selected contractor. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of

applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless

specified otherwise in this section.

b. All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS

manufacturer recommendations.

c. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be

the design responsibility of the BMS contractor. If complications arise, however,

due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the

BMS contractor, the contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing

the selected components.

d. Class 2 Wiring

1) All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless

otherwise specified.

2) Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations.

Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the

building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application.

Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring

shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements.

e. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power

wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal

wiring.

f. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables,

panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling

and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

2. BMS Line Voltage Power Source

a. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from

panel boards and circuit breakers.

b. Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for

any other purposes.

c. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.

3. BMS Raceway

a. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this

specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.

b. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway

(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.

c. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the

building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

d. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3

feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may

be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.

4. Penetrations

a. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BMS conduits and

raceways.

b. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using

approved fire resistive sealant.

c. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or

enclosed raceway.




d. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb,

true, and square.

5. BMS Identification Standards

a. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to

the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.

Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and

troubleshooting.

6. BMS Panel Installation

a. The BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less

than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet

shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other

trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.

7. Input Devices

a. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation

b. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

8. HVAC Input Devices – Genera1

a. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation

b. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.

9. HVAC Output Devices

a. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendation.

2.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING





Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls 230993 - 1

SECTION 230993-SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems.

B. See division 26 drawings for additional information.

C. Contractor to meet with owner and using agency prior to submittals and the installation to

confirm sequences of operations and approval of approach.

1.3 CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. ROOFTOP (PACKAGED) UNITS

1. General:

a. Desired occupied and unoccupied cooling set points/schedules are programmed via

the Building Management System (BMS).

1) Occupied Cooling setpoint: 75°F (Adjustable).

2) Unoccupied Cooling setpoint: 85°F (Adjustable).

3) Zone Setpoint Adjust: The occupant shall be able to adjust the zone

temperature cooling setpoints at the zone sensor.

4) Zone Unoccupied Override: A timed local override control shall allow an

occupant to override the schedule and place the unit into an occupied mode

for an adjustable period of time (2 hours, Adjustable). At the expiration of

this time, control of the unit shall automatically return to the schedule.

5) Heating of the space shall be provided through the existing boiler and

distribution system. If the outdoor air temperature rises above

68°F (Adjustable), the heating system shall be locked out. If the outdoor air

temperature falls below 65°F (Adjustable), the heating system shall be

allowed to function unless cooling is required for the space.

6) When units are providing cooling for the space the existing heating system

shall be locked out/de-energized.

7) Provide separate, independent linkage control for outside, exhaust and

mixed air dampers.

b. The smoke detectors in the supply and return air duct will input a smoke alarm if

products of combustion are sensed. The supply/exhaust fans shall de-energize, and

the outdoor air damper will close while opening the return air damper fully.

c. Both units shall work with each other to provide the required occupied and

unoccupied conditions for the space.

2. Supply Fan:




a. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless shutdown

on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a user definable

minimum runtime, 5 minutes (Adjustable).

1) Alarms shall be provided as follows:

a) Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

b) Supply Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

c) Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user

definable limit (Adjustable).

b. The supply fan VFD maximum speed setting shall be determined by the test and

balance contractor to achieve design air flow. The minimum speed shall be 30%

(Adjustable).

3. Power Exhaust Fan:

a. The unit(s) exhaust fan shall be interlocked to run whenever the unit runs unless

shutdown on safeties.

b. Control - Building Static Pressure: The exhaust fan shall run when

commanded on.

The controller shall measure building static pressure and modulate the exhaust fan

VFD

speed to maintain a building static pressure setpoint of .05 in H H2O (Adjustable).

The exhaust fan VFD speed shall not drop below 20% (Adjustable).

c. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1) High Building Static Pressure: If the building static pressure is 25%

(Adjustable) greater than setpoint.

2) Low Building Static Pressure: If the building static pressure is 25%

(Adjustable) less than setpoint.

3) Exhaust Fan VFD Fault.

d. Exhaust Air Damper: The exhaust air damper shall open anytime the unit runs and

shall close anytime the unit stops. The exhaust air damper shall close 30 second

(Adjustable) after the fan stops.

e. Fan Status: The unit shall monitor the fan status.

1) Alarms shall be provided as follows:

a) Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.

b) Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.

c) Fan Runtime Exceeded: Fan status runtime exceeds a user definable

limit (Adjustable.).

4. Zone Temperature Control:

a. The unit shall measure the zone temperature and shall modulate the supply fan

variable frequency drive (VFD) speed to maintain zone temperature setpoint. The

fan speed shall increase as the zone temperature rises above cooling setpoint. The

supply fan VFD speed shall not drop below 30% (Adjustable).

5. Cooling Stages:

a. The unit shall measure the zone temperature and stage the cooling to maintain its

cooling setpoint. To prevent short cycling, there shall be a user

definable (Adjustable) delay between stages, and each stage shall have a user

definable (Adjustable) minimum runtime.

b. The cooling shall be enabled whenever:

1) Outside air temperature is greater than 60°F (Adjustable).

2) AND the economizer is disabled or fully open.

3) AND the zone temperature is above cooling setpoint.

4) AND the supply fan status is on.




5) AND the heating is not active.

6. Electric Heating Stages:

a. The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and stage the heating to

maintain its setpoint. To prevent short cycling, there shall be a user

definable (Adjustable.) delay between stages, and each stage shall have a user

definable (Adjustable.) minimum runtime.

b. The heating shall be enabled whenever:

1) Outside air temperature is less than 65°F (Adjustable.).

2) AND the supply air temperature is below setpoint.

3) AND the supply fan status is on.

7. Zone Optimal Start:

a. The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm for morning start-up. This algorithm

shall minimize the unoccupied warm-up or cool-down period while still achieving

comfort conditions by the start of scheduled occupied period. The start time shall

automatically adjust based on changes in outside air and zone temperatures.

8. Demand Control Ventilation-Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Control:

a. When in the occupied mode, the controller shall measure the return air CO2 levels

and modulate the outside air dampers open on rising CO2 concentrations,

overriding normal damper operation to maintain a CO2 setpoint

of 750 ppm (Adjustable).

b. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1) If the Carbon Dioxide (CO2) is greater than 1000 ppm (Adjustable) when in

the occupied mode.

9. Return Air Humidity:

a. The unit shall monitor the return air humidity and use as required for economizer

control and humidity control.


1) High Return Air Humidity: If the return air humidity is greater

than 70% (Adjustable).

2) Low Return Air Humidity: If the return air humidity is less

than 35% (Adjustable).

10. Hot Gas Reheat (Dehumidification):

a. The unit shall measure the return air humidity and override cooling sequence to

maintain return air humidity at or below 50% RH (Adjustable)

b. During dehumidification, the heating shall modulate to maintain a setpoint 1°F

(Adjustable) less than the zone cooling setpoint.

c. When the return humidity falls to 3% or more below the gas reheat humidity

setpoint, hot gas reheat shall de-energize.

11. Return Air Temperature:

a. Monitor the return air temperature and use as required for setpoint control and

economizer control.


1) High Return Air Temp: If the return air temperature is greater than

90°F (Adjustable).

2) Low Return Air Temp: If the return air temperature is less than 45°F

(Adjustable).

12. Supply Air Temperature:

a. Monitor and control the supply air temperature by staging compressors. See chart

for supply air temperature reset schedule (All temperatures shall be adjustable):




SUPPLY AIR RESET SCHEDULE

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (°F) SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE (°F)

55 or Below 60

56 - 60 58

61 - 70 57

71 - 80 56

81 - Above 55


1) High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater

than 120°F (Adjustable).

2) Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less

than 45°F (Adjustable).

13. Mixed Air Temperature:

a. Monitor the mixed air temperature and use as required for economizer control.


1) High Mixed Air Temp: If the mixed air temperature is greater than

90°F (Adjustable.).

2) Low Mixed Air Temp: If the mixed air temperature is less than 45°F

(Adjustable).

14. Low Ambient Cooling:

a. When the outdoor air sensor senses temperature below the low ambient setpoint

and the thermostat is calling for cooling, the unit will operate in the low ambient

mode.

b. When operating in low ambient mode, if the evaporator low limit sensor

temperature below 26°F will de-energize the associated compressor(s). If the call

for cooling is still present at the end of the Anti-Short Cycle delay and the

evaporator temperature sensor temperature is above 26°F, the unit will resume

operation.

15. Freeze Protection:

a. When the freeze-stat senses a temperature below 40°F (Adjustable), the supply and

exhaust fans shall de-energize, outside and exhaust air dampers shall close, return

air damper shall open. Unit shall generate an alarm upon receiving a freeze-stat

status.

16. Emergency Shutdown:

a. The unit shall de-energize and generate an alarm upon receiving an emergency

shutdown signal.

17. Economizer:

a. The unit shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the economizer

dampers in sequence to maintain a setpoint 2°F less than the zone cooling setpoint.

The outside air dampers shall maintain a minimum adjustable position of 20%

(Adjustable) open whenever occupied.

1) The economizer shall be enabled whenever:

a) Outside air temperature is less than 65°F (Adjustable).

b) AND the outside air enthalpy is less than 22 Btu/lb (Adjustable).

c) AND the outside air temperature is less than the return air

temperature.

d) AND the outside air enthalpy is less than the return air enthalpy.

e) AND the supply fan status is on.

2) The economizer shall close whenever:




a) Mixed air temperature drops from 45°F to 40°F (Adjustable).

b) OR on loss of supply fan status.

c) OR freeze-stat is on.

3) The outside and exhaust air dampers shall close, the return air damper shall

open when the unit is off.

18. Filters:

a. Filter bank shall have a differential pressure switch measuring the pressure drop

across the filter banks, an alarm shall be generated whenever the pressure drop

across the filters is excessive (Dirty Filter) (Adjustable).

19. Minimum Point Description: Provide points as required for sequence of operation.

Hardware Points Software Points

Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Loop Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic

Mixed Air Temperature x x x

Building Static Pressure x x x

Outside Air Humidity x x x

Outside Air Temperature x x x

Return Air Carbon Dioxide PPM x x x

Return Air Humidity x x x

Return Air Temperature x x x

Supply Air Temperature x x x

Zone Setpoint Adjust x x

Zone Temperature x x x

Zone Humidity x x x

Zone Carbon Dioxide PPM x x

Mixed Air Dampers x x x

Supply Fan VFD Speed x x x

Exhaust Fan VFD Speed x x x

Freeze-stat x x x x

Return Air Smoke Detector x x x x

Supply Air Smoke Detector x x x x

Supply Fan Status x x x

Supply Fan VFD Fault x x x

Exhaust Fan Status x x x

Exhaust Fan VFD Fault x x x

Zone Override x x x

Cooling Stage 1 x x x

Cooling Stage 2 x x x

Heating Stage 1 x x x

Heating Stage 2 x x x






Supply Fan Start/Stop x x x

Exhaust Fan Start/Stop x x x

Exhaust Air Damper x x x

Outside Air Damper x x x

Mixed Air Damper x x x

Building Static Pressure Setpoint x x x

Cooling Setpoint x x x

Dehumidification Setpoint x x x

Economizer Zone Temperature Setpoint

x x x

Filter Differential x x x

Filter Change Required x x

Return Air Carbon Dioxide PPM Setpoint

x x x

Zone Carbon Dioxide PPM Setpoint x x

Emergency Shutdown x x x

Schedule x

Compressor Runtime Exceeded x

High Mixed Air Temperature x

High Return Air Carbon Dioxide Concentration

x

High Return Air Humidity x

High Return Air Temperature x

High Supply Air Temperature x

High Zone Temperature x

Low Mixed Air Temperature x

Low Return Air Humidity x

Low Return Air Temperature x

Low Supply Air Temperature x

Low Zone Temperature x

Supply Fan Failure x

Supply Fan in Hand x

Supply Fan Runtime Exceeded x

Exhaust Fan Failure x

Exhaust Fan in Hand x

Exhaust Fan Runtime Exceeded x

High Building Static Pressure x






Low Building Static Pressure x

B. DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER

1. General:

a. Unit shall run based on desired occupied and unoccupied cooling set points per

manufacturer programmable thermostat. Ductless Split Systems currently will not

be connected to the BMS.

2. Occupied Mode:

a. Supply fan either runs continuously or cycles upon a call for cooling.

b. Upon a rise in space temperature above the occupied cooling set point 72°F

(Adjustable), cooling cycle is energized. As the space temperature falls back

toward the occupied set point, then the cooling cycle shall be de-energized.

3. Unoccupied Mode:

a. Upon a rise in space temperature above the unoccupied cooling set point 72°F

(Adjustable), cooling cycle is energized. As the space temperature falls back

toward the unoccupied set point, then the cooling cycle shall be de-energized.

C. HEAT TRACE

1. Provide electrical power to heat tracing when outside air temperature falls below 40

degrees F and disable electrical power when outside air temperature rises above 45

degrees F. Provide an alarm if current is not sensed in circuit when outside air

temperature drops below 35 degrees F (Adjustable).






Refrigerant Piping 232300 - 1

SECTION 232300-REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

B. The work under this Section of the Specification shall include the furnishing of labor, materials

and equipment for the installation of complete system to provide continuous and satisfactory

service.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include

pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Filter dryers.

5. Strainers.

6. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and

fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil

traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show

interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design

actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes

to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between




compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and

compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Welding certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

D. Field quality-control test reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

Systems."

C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer

Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior

and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with

other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system

components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation/wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate installation of equipment supports, and wall penetrations.

D. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.

Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section “Through-

Penetration Firestop Systems” for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through

fire and smoke barriers.

E. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

F. Coordinate manufacturer installation requirements.




1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: Two each, containing everything required to conduct one

test.

2. Refrigerant: Two containers each, with 20 lb of refrigerant.

3. Filter-Dryers: Three of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Refrigerants:

a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.

b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc,; Fluorocarbon Div.

d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.

2. Refrigerant Specialties:

a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air

Conditioning Division.

b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.

c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.

d. Henry Valve Company.

e. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. Type BcuP (copper-phosphorous alloy) for copper fittings.

E. Flexible Connectors: 500-psig minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze core, high-

tensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections; dehydrated, pressure tested,

minimum 7 inches long.

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced

protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-

long assembly.




4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.



C. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.



D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.




1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.


4. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and ac coil.



8. Manual operator.

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled

by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.

2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Threaded.



G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.

6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.

9. Working Pressure Rating450 psig.

H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.


6. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and ac coil.

7. End Connections: Socket.

8. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.



I. Straight-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.




3. End Connections: Socket or flare.



J. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.

3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.




K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.




L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and

neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



N. Mufflers:








O. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL.


4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve.

5. End Connections: Socket or threaded.



P. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.


2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.



2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig maximum working pressure and 200 deg F operating

temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-

coded moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.

B. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F maximum

operating temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections;

molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.

2.5 REFRIGERANTS



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.

2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.

4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.

C. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

D. ASHRAE 34, match refrigerant types specified for equipment in other Division 23 sections.




2.6 PIPE INSULATION

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Closed-cell

polyolefin/polyethylene insulation is not acceptable as a substitution for ASTM C534 closed-

cell rubber materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. Nomaco K-Flex; Insul-Sheet and Insul-Tube 180.

2. Maximum K-Factor: 0.28 at 75 deg. F. mean temperature.

F. Accessory Materials

1. Accessories: Provide accessories per insulating system manufacturer’s recommendations,

including the following:

a. Closure Materials: Insulation Sealing Tape, butt strips, bands, wires, staples,

adhesives, pressure-sensitive tapes and mastics.

b. Support Materials: Hanger straps, hanger rods, saddles, support high-density

blocks, and support rings.

2. Adhesives for Indoor Applications: VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.7 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive:

1. Products:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.

c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.

d. Childers Products; CP-82.

e. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.




2.8 LINESET COVER SYSTEM

A. High quality PVC with UV inhibitors for installation in all weather conditions. Snap on covers

and accessories such as but not limited to: coupling, elbows, caps etc.

B. Provide size as required for installation.

C. Must be UL listed.

D. Manufacturer paint color as indicated by Owners Representative/DGS Inspector.

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Line-Hide by Mitsubishi

2. Diversitech.

3. Fortress

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines NPS 4 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,

Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: NPS 3 and smaller, Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and

wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping:

1. Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor

suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers.

F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.




G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.

H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe

safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines adjacent to filter-dryers at condensing units at

the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.

2. Thermostatic expansion valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.

K. Install permanent filter dryers in liquid lines at condensing units between compressor and

thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.

L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

M. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Locate exterior pipe supports maximum 6 feet apart. Pipe supports shall be constructed of

100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with uniform load capacity of 500 pounds

per linear foot of support. Steel frame shall be 14 gauge galvanized per ASTM A653.

Attaching hardware shall be zinc- plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM

B633. Install per manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. Similar to Eaton Dura-

blok

D. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section “Common Work

Results for HVAC.”




E. Basic HVAC piping insulation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC

Piping Insulation.”

F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

G. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of

Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.

L. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.

M. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment refrigeration

equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and

inspection. Install access doors or panels as required if valves or equipment requiring

maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

N. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground (if applicable).

O. Install refrigerant piping in rigid conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit

installation of full-thickness insulation.

Q. Belowground, install copper tubing in protective PVC conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.

R. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be

exposed to mechanical injury.

S. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

T. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and expansion

valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.




U. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats,

and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near

expansion-valve bulb.

V. Install hangers, supports, and anchor products.

W. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

X. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

Y. Support vertical runs at each floor.

Z. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Pipe Label Color Schedule

2. Refrigerant Piping:

a. Background Color: Yellow.

b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Braze and solder joints according to Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for

Mechanical.”

D. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during soldering or brazing

or welding, to prevent scale formation.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.





A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

lower of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and

low side of system indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required

by authorities having jurisdiction.

e. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.




3. Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass.

4. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

5. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

6. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.

3.8 INSULATION SCHEDULE

SERVICE INSULATION

MATERIAL

INSULATION

THICKNESS

VAPOR

RETARDER

REQUIRED

OUTDOOR ABOVEGROUND REFRIGERANT SUCTION AND HOT GAS PIPING

All sizes Flexible Elastomeric 1” Yes

INDOOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION AND HOT GAS PIPING

All sizes Flexible Elastomeric 1/2” Yes




Metal Ducts 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113-METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, and exhaust air-distribution systems in

pressure classes from minus 10-inch wg to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Double wall spiral ducts and fittings

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants materials.

6. Hangers and supporting.



service.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC".

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories".

3. Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for Mechanical”.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and

distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of

duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer. Accompany requests for

layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original

design results without increasing system total pressure.


A. Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction,

reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design

criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.




B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1-2004.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top of ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct

layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Perimeter moldings.




D. Provide informational submittals in Operation and Maintenance Manuals in addition to action


E. Welding certificates.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. For each duct system provide, the gauge, material, joint type, seam type, and reinforcement to

be provided for each duct size.

H. Certificates: For certification required in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” Article.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code

- Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint

and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”

2. NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.”

C. Duct Cleanliness: Duct Cleanliness for New Construction (SMACNA 2000).

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Third

Edition" and all addenda for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction

methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,

roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.




B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and G90

(for rectangular ducts) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for

surfaces exposed to view in finished spaces, suitable for field painting.

C. Stainless-Steel: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2D finish for

concealed ducts and , or No. 4D finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for

concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts

F. Tie Rods: Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or

less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams -

RectangularDucts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

E. Minimum duct gauge to be 24.

2.4 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS (GYMNASIUM AND

READINESS AREA)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


1. Lindab Inc.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.




3. SEMCO Incorporated.

4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct.

C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

D. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

E. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular

Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

F. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or

NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean

temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without

compressing insulation.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.

4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

G. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C 534, Type II for

sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean

temperature.

H. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch solid sheet steel.

I. Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Traverse

(Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,

duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible."

J. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular

Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."




10

2.5 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND (SPIRAL) DUCTS AND FITTINGS (GYMNASIUM AND

READINESS AREA)



1. Lindab Inc.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.

3. SEMCO Incorporated.

4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

B. Construction

1. Duct is of spiral lock seam construction with a mechanically formed seam locking

indentation evenly spaced along the spiral seam. All spiral duct 8" diameter and larger

shall incorporate multiple corrugations between spiral seams. Inner and outer duct will

be of spiral lockseam construction.

2. Double wall duct and fittings will consist of a solid metal inner liner, 2" thick x 1.0 lb/ft3

layer of glass fiber insulation, and a solid outer pressure shell.

3. Glass fiber insulation will have a maximum conductivity factor (k) of 0.26 BTU-in/hr x

ft2 x °F at 75°F mean ambient temperature (R=3.8).

4. Insulation stop will be a closed-cell elastomeric foam with a maximum conductivity

factor (k) of 0.28 BTU- in/hr x ft2 x °F and an operating temperature range of -70°F to

+220°F.

5. Surface finish shall be Galvanized steel in accordance with latest SMACNA standards.

6. Antimicrobial - EPA listed coating containing antimicrobial compound complies with

UL standard - not to exceed flame or smoke developed ratings of 25/50.

7. Material thickness constructed from galvanized steel in accordance with the latest

SMACNA’s HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

8. Fitting ends shall be sized to slip-fit into spiral duct of the same nominal size.

9. Joint sealing: Fitting ends are equipped with factory installed, double-lipped, U-profile

gaskets. When installed in spiral duct per manufacturer’s installation instructions, the

gasket creates a seal against the interior of the spiral duct. The system tightness shall be

factory warranted to meet SMACNA’s Leakage Class 3 performance.

10. The gasket shall be EPDM rubber. The gasket is located in a groove at the end of the

fitting and securely fastened by means of a stainless steel band. In order to achieve

optimum sealing for all diameters, different size gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall

be classified by Underwriters Laboratories for flame spread and smoke developed in

accordance with ASTM E84-91a

11. Exposed ductwork in Military Gym and Overflow Readiness Area to be double spiral

ductwork.

12. No fiberglass will be allowed in the airstream.

2.6 DUCT LINER

A. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying

with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements::

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.

b. Armacell LLC.




c. Rubatex International, LLC

2. Thickness: 1-inch, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

3. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 at 75 deg F mean temperature.

4. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.40 at 1-inch thickness. Sound absorption coefficients as

tested on an Acoustical Materials Association Standard A-type mounting in accordance

with ASTM Standard C423:

MINIMUM SOUND ABSORPTION COEFFICIENTS FOR DUCT LINING

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)

Lining Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

1” .01 .13 .39 .69 .29 .26

1-1/2” .07 .26 .92 .31 .49 .53

2” .14 .62 .44 .43 .51 .45

5.

6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

7. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with

NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified

acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight

seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:




1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.


6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.


steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.

3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.

4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.

5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.

6. Water resistant.


8. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


9. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.

10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.


steel, or aluminum sheets.

E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be

rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.




B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized

rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and

bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

4. Risers: Supports along the long dimension of the duct cross-section, in accordance with

SMACNA Manual, Figure 4-7.

H. Round Duct in Finished Spaces: Hangers around full perimeter of ducts with threaded rod

supports.

2.9 EXTERIOR DUCT

A. See specification section 230700 for additional information.

2.10 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction

according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible” and

complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod

applications, and joint types and intervals. Fabricate ductworks to be free from vibration, rattle

or drumming under all operating conditions.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure class.

2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA’s

“HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.”

3. Transverse Joints: Utilize prefabricated slide-on joints or formed-on flanges.

B. Prefabricated Slide-on Joints: Constructed using manufacturer’s guidelines for material

thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, joining methods, and joint reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Nexus, Inc.




c. Quickduc, Inc.

d. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards-

Metal and Flexible,” Figure1-4, joints T-25a or T-25b (TDC or TDF) using corner, bolt, cleat,

and gasket details.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Lockformer.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.

D. Requirements for Prefabricated Slide-on Joints and Formed-on Flanges:

1. Minimum sheet metal gauges shall conform to both Rectangular Duct Reinforcement

Tables 1-3 through 1-9 and Transverse Joint Reinforcement Table 1-12.

2. Cleats or clips as manufactured for the specific purpose of joining adjacent flanges shall

be utilized in conjunction with transverse joints; sheet metal screws alone are not

acceptable for joining flanges.

E. Restrictions for Use of Tie Rods:

1. Tie rods or other type of intermediate duct reinforcement shall not be used in ducts with

longest side less than 37 inches.

2. Where tie rod connections penetrate ductwork, neoprene backed galvanized washers shall

be used to seal penetrations airtight.

3. Where tie rods are in sound lined ductwork, seal edges of sound lining penetrations with

sound lining adhesive.

4. Tie rods at each joint and between joint and mid span shall align to minimize air

turbulence.

F. Rectangular Duct Fittings:

1. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, etc., in accordance with

SMACNA manual Figures 2-1 through 2-10 and the following:

a. Rectangular elbows shall be figure 2-2 Type RE-2 with turning vanes. Vanes shall

be only double radius type Figures 2-3 and 2-4.

b. Radius elbows shall be Figure 2-2 Type RE-1 only.

c. Branch connections shall be 45-degree entry type only.

d. Transitions and offsets shall follow Figure 2-7 and where space permits shall slope

a maximum of 15 degrees, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

G. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross Break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and

0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are

lined.

2.11 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION

A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction

Standards-Metal and Flexible.” Fabricate ducts larger than 72 inches in diameter with butt-

welded longitudinal seams.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Lindab Incorporated.

b. McGill AirFlow Corporation.




c. Monroe Metal Manufacturing Company.

d. SEMCO Incorporated.

B. Duct Joints:

1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before

and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two

internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.

3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per

SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-2.

4. Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket.

Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer’s tolerances.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2) Lindab Inc.

C. Fitting Seams:

1. Spot or tack welded and sealed with a specified sealant for pressure classes from minus

2-inch wg to plus 2-inch wg., unless otherwise indicated.

2. Continuously welded for pressure classes from plus 2-inch wg to 10-inch wg., unless


D. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC

Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,” with metal thicknesses specified for

longitudinal-seam straight ducts. Fittings shall be either “Lo Loss” or conical type. Fabricate

with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto

branch tap entrance.

1. Saddle taps and bullhead tees are not acceptable.

2. At Contractor’s option, factory fabricated manifolds (one or more “Lo Loss” or conical

taps permanently attached to a piece of spiral pipe in the factory) may be provided.

E. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-

formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow

construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45-and

90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

2. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for

30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

3. Round Elbows Larger Then 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored elbows unless space

restrictions require mitered elbows.

4. 90-Degree, 2-piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-

handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit

using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

5. Die-Formed Elbow Construction for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All

Pressures: 0.040-inch thick metal with 2-piece welded construction.

6. Pleated Elbow Metal Thickness for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures

through 10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch.




7. Round Gored-Elbow Construction: Welded construction complying with SMACNA’s

“HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible,” with metal thicknesses

specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts. Minimum number of pieces:

a. 0-45 Degrees: 3.

b. 46-60 Degrees: 4.

c. 61-90 Degrees: 5.

2.12 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 100 percent adhesive coverage at

liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is

prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to all transverse edges of liner.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge

overlapping.

E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts.

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12

inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches

longitudinally.

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either

channel or “Z” profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the

following locations:

1. Fan discharges.

2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500

fpm or where indicated.

4. Branch duct taps.

5. Duct access doors.

I. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane

assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means

are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

J. Source Quality Control:

1. Inspect ductwork for compliance with SMACNA manual and NAIMA AH116 “Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standard.” Repair or replace deficiencies. Utilize NAIMA

“Fibrous Glass Duct System Installation Checklist.”

2. Seal ends of each duct section with plastic in the shop immediately after fabrication to

keep airside surfaces clean during handling, shipping, installation, storage, etc.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.

B. Construct and Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in lengths as long as possible to reduce joints.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure

couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3

screws in each coupling.

G. Install ducts unless otherwise indicated vertically and horizontally and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines, avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward

to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Sleeves, Generally: Install minimum 22-gauge sleeves between duct and duct insulation and

wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations.

1. Size sleeve to provide annular space specified or detailed on the drawings.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and

with approved sealant for gypsum board assemblies.

N. Floor, Wall, and Partition Penetrations, Generally: Seal annular space between sleeves and duct

or duct insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

1. Where sleeves are exposed in finished spaces, provide 1-inch wide perimeter flange

(including corners) on both sides of wall.

2. There shall be no direct contact of duct with sleeves.




3. Where ductwork passes through a wall, floor or ceiling, there shall be a clear annular

space of 1” between the duct or duct insulation and sleeve. After all of the ductwork is

installed the Contractor shall check the clearance, pack the voids full depth with mineral

fiber batt insulation and caulk both ends with a non-aging, non-hardening sealant backed

by a polyethylene foam rod or permanently flexible firestop material.

O. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior

walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct

insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4

sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

P. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior walls,

install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke

dampers are specified in Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories.” Firestopping materials

and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop

Systems.” Provide sleeves as detailed or required by damper manufacturer.

Q. Protect duct interiors from the elements, and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow

SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."

1. Cleanliness Level: Advanced.

2. Seal ends of ductwork and air devices with plastic as they are installed. In no case shall a

duct be left open ended.

3. Once system is placed in operation, provide temporary filters at each return air inlet and

at each AHU until final acceptance by the Owner. Refer to Division 23 Section

“Particulate Air Filtration.”

4. If cleanliness level is not achieved, clean all ductwork.

R. Paint interiors of metal ducts that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream and

downstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a

compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified

in Division 9 painting Sections.

3.2 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal duct for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in “ Duct Schedule”

Article according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible”.

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B.

6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:

7. Seal Class A.

8. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

9. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.




10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C.

11. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

13. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

C. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

D. For ducts without external insulation in finished spaces, utilize tape sealing system.

3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORTING

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and

supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

F. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of

failure (proof-test) load.

G. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according with Division 23 Section

"Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.




3.5 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report

for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct

sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.

b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative

duct sections, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each


c. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative



d. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative



e. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test

representative duct sections, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct

area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Installation of Lined Ductwork:

1. Verify lined duct is free from tears or punctures in facing as each duct section is installed.

Repair following NAIMA standard procedures.

2. Utilize NAIMA “Fibrous Glass Duct System Installation Checklist” as ductwork is

installed.

3. The Owner or their authorized representative intends to inspect the installation of lined

duct throughout the construction process to verify conformance with fabrication and

installation requirements.

D. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.




2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC

Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

E. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch

insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with

Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.




4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.

6. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

7. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

8. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

9. Seal ducts.

F. Cleanliness Verification:

1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.

2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and re-inspect ducts.

3.8 EXTENT OF SOUND LINING (DUCT LINER)

A. As a minimum, ducts from/to heating, ventilating and air conditioning units for a distance of

fifteen feet (15’) from the units shall be acoustically lined. Return and supply ducts from fan

powered equipment to air devices shall be acoustically lined and as noted on drawings.

B. All duct sizes indicated on drawings are airside sizes. Increase sheet metal size as required to

accommodate sound lining.

3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing for HVAC."

3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Equipment:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

B. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Equipment:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

C. Liner:

1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I; 1-1/2 inches thick.




2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I; 1-1/2 inches thick.

D. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct




Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct



3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three

segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments

for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five

segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded.

E. Branch Configuration:


Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.




2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.




Air Duct Accessories 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes the following:

1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Turning vanes.

3. Duct-mounting access doors.

4. Flexible connectors.

5. Flexible ducts.

6. Duct Smoke Detectors



service.




B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

D. Damper Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data.

a. Include UL ratings, leakage, pressure drop, and maximum pressure data.

b. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with NFPA, UL, BSA or MEA, CSFM, and applicable building codes.

C. Dampers shall be warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 5 years.




D. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.

E. Damper pressure drop ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance

with AMCA 500.


A. A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and

packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.

B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect

materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and

having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed

to view.

C. Stainless-Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts

and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:




1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Ruskin Company

b. Air Balance Inc.

c. American Warming and Ventilating

d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

e. Greenheck Fan Corp.

f. McGill AirFlow Corporation

g. Metropolitan Air Technology.

h. Nailor Industries Inc.

i. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen

damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed

position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct

consistent with pressure class.

C. Pressure Classes of 3-inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

D. Standard, Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, opposed-blade design as indicated,

standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized or stainless (match duct construction) sheet steel

channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with

flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for

installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed steel Blades: 0.064-inch-thick, galvanized or stainless (match duct

construction) sheet steel.

3. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.

4. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel (match duct construction).

5. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.

6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.3 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and

Flexible” for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch-wide, double-vane, curved blades of

galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches

o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Duro Dyne Corp.

c. Ward Industries, Inc.




2.4 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Standard bolted access door: Oval outer door connected to an inner plate by spring loaded

carriage bolts, with hand knobs for tightening, inert cellular sponge gasket, and permanently

bonded polyester insulation (to prevent moisture from forming on outer surface).

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating

b. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

d. Greenheck.

e. McGill Airflow Corporation.

f. Nailor Industries, Inc.

g. Ventfabrics, Inc.

h. Ward Industries, Inc.

2. Doors shall be leak free at 20” w.g. static pressure.

3. Doors shall be equal to McGill Airflow Corporation Model AOBXFSDF for rectangular

ducts and Model AOBXFSDC for round ducts.

C. For round ducts too small to locate other specified access doors, provide hinged access doors.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Semco.

b. Approved equal.

2. Door shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel.

3. Hinge shall be continuous type.

4. Latches shall be sash lock type and a minimum of 3 (one on each side, except hinge side)

shall be provided.

5. Gasket provided shall be continuous.

6. Doors shall be suitable for the pressure class of the duct systems in which they are located.

7. Externally insulate access doors in insulated duct systems. Insulation shall be equal to type

and thickness specified for the duct system in division 23, Section “Mechanical

Insulation.”

8. Hinged access doors shall be equal to Semco type S40.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS



1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.




C. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.

2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 10 to plus 250 deg F.

2.6 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation and sound lining thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

2.7 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Quantities of duct smoke detectors required and the locations shall be as required per NFPA

90A and International Mechanical Code. The duct smoke detector shall be furnished and wired

under division 26. Installed under division 23.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible – Second Edition" for metal ducts, NAIMA AH124

“Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard,” and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction

Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories

in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,

and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install manual volume dampers for each air device.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Where dampers are installed in ducts having

duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with

nosing at hat channel. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.




F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and where required for testing and balancing.

G. Install duct round or oval access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories as follows:

1. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment.

2. Adjacent to duct smoke detectors, providing access for inspection and cleaning.

3. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum

50-foor spacing.

H. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, oval access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.

5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.

2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.

3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.

4. Head and Shoulders Access 18 inches in diameter.

5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

J. Install metal nosing at duct access doors and duct taps installed in ducts with liner. Seal liner

behind nosing with adhesive.

K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and

motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

L. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Equipment".

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.

3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.




B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section “Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.”




Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713-DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Air Devices.



service.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories".


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate quantity, model number, size, cfm and

accessories furnished.




B. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 GENERAL

Provide air devices to complete the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems. Air

devices in ceiling shall have flat white lacquered finish unless noted otherwise. Coordinate the

appropriate border and mount for the specific application.




1.6 SELECTION CRITERIA

A. Air devices shall be selected for 5 DB lower than the listed Noise Criteria of the Room.

B. Noise Criteria of Room:

1. Rooms with NC 25 Criteria: Military Gym and Overflow Readiness Area.

2. Rooms with NC 35 Criteria: Common Areas, all spaces not mentioned in the other NC

categories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR DEVICES

A. Supply Air Register:

1. Manufacturers: available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Titus 301RS

b. Price Industries.

c. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Coordinate the appropriate border and mount for the specific application.

3. The deflection blades shall be parallel to the short dimension of the grille. Construction

shall be of steel with a 1¼-inch wide border on all sides. Screw holes shall be

countersunk for a neat appearance. Corners shall be welded with full penetration

resistance welds.

4. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross-section to

meet published test performance data. Blades shall be spaced on ¾-inch centers. Blades

shall have steel friction pivots on both ends to allow individual blade adjustment without

loosening or rattling. Plastic blade pivots are not acceptable.

5. Opposed-blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must

be operable from the face of the grille.

6. The grille finish shall be #26 white.

7. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes.

8. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117

Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of

film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The paint

must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50-inch pound

force applied.

9. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the register. The register

shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.

B. Return Air Register:



a. Titus 350RL


c. Tuttle & Bailey.





3. The fixed deflection blades shall be parallel to the long dimension of the grille.

Construction shall be of steel with a 1¼-inch wide border on all sides. Screw holes shall

be countersunk for a neat appearance. Corners shall be welded with full penetration

resistance welds.

4. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross-section to

meet published test performance data. Blades shall be firmly held in place by mullions

from behind the grille and fixed to the grille by welding in place. Blade deflection angle

shall be available at 35°.

5. Opposed-blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must

be operable from the face of the grille.


7. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315° F for 30 minutes.





force applied.



C. Supply Air Register (Spiral Duct):



a. Titus US-DL-SV


c. Tuttle & Bailey.


3. The drum louver shall be split vane. Construction shall be aluminum extruded border

and blades. Felt seal between drum and border to prevent leakage. Foam gasket for a

tight seal to spiral ductwork.

4. Opposed-blade heavy duty volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel.

Damper must be operable from the face of the grille.







force applied.



D. Return Air Register (Spiral Duct):



a. Titus US-DL


c. Tuttle & Bailey.





3. The drum louver shall be single vane. Construction shall be aluminum extruded border

and blades. Felt seal between drum and border to prevent leakage. Foam gasket for a

tight seal to spiral ductwork.

4. Opposed-blade heavy duty volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel.

Damper must be operable from the face of the grille.







force applied.



2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate air devices according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing

for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where air devices are to be installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air devices level and plumb.

B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air devices locations

have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow

pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical.

Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a

determination of final location.

C. Install air devices with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of

dampers, air extractors, combination fire/smoke dampers and fire dampers.




3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust air devices to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air

balancing.




Rooftop (Packaged) Units 237223 - 1

SECTION 237223-ROOFTOP (PACKAGED) UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rooftop unit and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include all rated capacities at scheduled design

conditions, operating characteristics, general product features, options and accessories, controls,

pre-programmed controls sequences, all end devices, and unit warranties provided.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

a. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, corner weights,

required clearances, components, and location and size of each field connection.

b. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

c. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-

installed and field-installed wiring.

d. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating

weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors

available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Factory start-up, inspection, and check-out reports to be provided to engineer for review prior to

final equipment acceptance and startup.

E. Field test reports: Written reports of tests.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and Maintenance Data to be provided with unit at

shipment including Mechanical O&M and Controls Instructions and O&M.

1. For units to include in maintenance manuals

a. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and

filters.




1.5 QUALITY

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

C. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2013, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and

Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."

D. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2013.

E. ASHRAE 90.1 and EER and IEER requirements

F. UL Compliance: Unit shall be ETL listed per UL standard 1995.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of curbs, equipment supports, and penetrations with equipment

provided.

B. Coordinate locations of connecting utilities including: electric, controls, and condensate with

equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer, agreeing to

replace/repair, within warranty period, components with inadequate and defective materials and

workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required

provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units

have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement

only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.

B. The manufacturer warrants that the products (other than services and labor) shall be free from

defects in workmanship and materials for twenty four (24) months from the date that such product

becomes operational except for compressors. Provide a five (5) year extended warranty on

compressors and electric heater.

1.8 FACTORY START-UP

A. Start-up to be provided by a factory-trained, certified technician.

B. The manufacture shall warrant its Start-up labor services for a period of ninety (90) days from

date of substantial completion of start-up by a factory-trained, certified technician who visits the

site after all other equipment has been installed and tested, and after all wiring, ducting and other

installation items are complete by the customer's representative.

C. The factory technician will review the installation of the dehumidification system, will assist with

any problems that occur when system is first started, will verify proper operation and adjust the




unit to perform according to the specifications detailed in the Technical Data Sheet contained in

the Operating and Maintenance Manual. The Technician will also provide on-site training to the

customers' personnel during start-up activities.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: Furnish two spare filters for each filter installed.


A. Unit shall be shipped with door handles locked shut with door handle set screws and outside air

hood closed to prevent damage during transport and temporary storage.

B. Follow IOM instructions for rigging and unloading the unit at its final location.

C. Unit shall be stored in a clean, dry place protected from weather and construction traffic in

accordance with the IOM. Handle carefully to avoid damage.

D. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

E. Accept products on site wrapped in protective cardboard wrap. Inspect for damage.

1.11 ENVIROMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are

in place, bearings lubricated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP (PACKAGED) UNITS

A. General

1. Single Zone Variable Air Volume Convertible package units with dual independent

refrigerant circuits for efficient part load operation and maximum comfort control shall

be provided. Units are self-contained and shall be completely piped, wired, charged and

tested at the factory. Units shall be pad mounted.

2. The units shall be factory wired, piped, charged with R-410A refrigerant and factory

tested prior to shipment. All unit wiring shall be both numbered and color coded. All

units shall be manufactured in a facility certified to ISO 9001 standards and the cooling

performance shall be rated in accordance with DOE and AHRI test procedures.

B. Unit Cabinet

1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, with exterior surfaces coated with a

non-chalking, powdered paint finish, certified at 1000 hours salt spray test per ASTM-

B117 standards. Indoor blower section shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2" thick




insulation, coated on the airside. Aluminum foil faced insulation shall be used in the

furnace compartment and be fastened with ridged fasteners to prevent insulation from

entering the air stream. Cabinet panels shall be "large" size, easily removable for

servicing and maintenance. Full perimeter base rails shall be provided to assure reliable

transit of equipment, overhead rigging and proper sealing on curb applications.

Disposable 2" filters shall be furnished and be accessible through a removable access

door, sealed airtight. Units filter track shall be designed to accommodate 2" filters. Fan

performance measuring ports shall be provided on the outside of the cabinet to allow

accurate air measurements of evaporator fan performance without removing panels or

creating air by-pass of the coils. Condensate pan shall be internally sloped and conform to

ASHRAE 62-89 self- draining standards. Condensate connection shall be a minimum of

1" I.D. female and be a ridged mount connection. Unit shall incorporate an outdoor air

damper with an outdoor air intake opening covered with a bird screen and a rain hood

painted to match the exterior of the unit.

C. Indoor (evaporator) fan assembly

1. Fan shall be a belt drive assembly and include an adjustable- pitch motor pulley. Job site

selected (B.H.P.) brake horsepower shall not exceed the motors nameplate horsepower

rating, plus the service factor. Units shall be designed not to operate above service factor.

Fan wheel shall be double-inlet type with forward-curved blades, dynamically balanced

to operate smoothly throughout the entire range of operation.

2. Airflow design shall be variable air volume (IntelliSpeed Supply Fan Control). Units

configured with the IntelliSpeed Supply Fan Control will contain a VFD for variable

volume supply fan operation. This allows the supply fan RPM to vary based on the

number of compressors or heating stages energized. The economizer's minimum position

will also be configurable to vary based on the supply fan VFD frequency output.

D. Outdoor (condenser) fan assembly

1. The outdoor fans shall be of the direct-driven propeller type, discharge air vertically, have

aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel spider brackets and shall be

dynamically balanced for smooth operation. The outdoor fan motors shall be totally

enclosed with permanently lubricated bearings, internally protected against overload

conditions and staged independently.

E. Refrigerant components

1. Compressors:

a. Shall be Scroll compressors internally protected with internal high-pressure relief

and over temperature protection.

b. Shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration and

noise, and be externally isolated on a dedicated, independent mounting.

2. Coils:

a. Evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically

bonded to seamless internally enhanced copper tubes with all joints brazed.

Provide phenolic coating.

b. Evaporator and Condenser coils shall be of the direct expansion, draw-thru, design.

3. Refrigerant Circuit and Refrigerant Safety Components shall include:

a. Balance-port thermostatic expansion valve with independent circuit feed system.

b. Filter drier/strainer to eliminate any moisture or foreign matter.




c. Accessible service gage connections on both suction and discharge lines to charge,

evacuate, and measure refrigerant pressure during any necessary servicing or

troubleshooting, without losing charge.

d. The refrigeration system shall provide at least 15° F of sub-cooling at design

conditions.

e. Hot gas bypass shall be factory-installed on compressor #1 discharge line to

provide cooling in low- load applications.

4. Unit Controls

a. Unit shall be complete with self-contained low- voltage control circuit protected by

a resettable circuit breaker on the 24-volt transformer side.

b. Unit shall incorporate a lockout circuit which provides reset capability at the space

thermostat or base unit, should any of the following standard safety devices trip

and shut off compressor.

1) Loss-of-charge/Low-pressure switch. (1) High- pressure switch, (2) Freeze-

protection thermostat, evaporator coil. If any of the above safety devices trip,

a LED (light-emitting diode) indicator shall flash a diagnostic code that

indicates which safety switch has tripped.

c. Unit shall incorporate "AUTO RESET" compressor over temperature, over current

protection.

d. Unit shall operate with conventional thermostat designs and have a low voltage

terminal strip for easy hook-up.

e. Unit control board shall have on-board diagnostics and fault code display.

f. Standard controls shall include anti-short cycle and low voltage protection, and

permit cooling operation down to 0 °F.

g. Control board shall monitor each refrigerant safety switch independently.

h. Control board shall retain last 5 fault codes in non-volatile memory, which will not

be lost in the event of a power loss.

5. Unit operating characteristics

a. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125° F outdoor temperature,

exceeding maximum load criteria of AHRI Standard 340/360. The compressor,

with standard controls, shall be capable of operation down to 25° F outdoor

temperature. Low ambient kit shall be available for operation to 0° F.

6. Electrical requirements

a. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single factory provided location

and be capable of side or bottom entry. Separate side and bottom openings shall be

provided for the control wiring.

7. Economizer

a. Outdoor and return air dampers that are interlocked and positioned by a fully-

modulating, spring return damper actuator. The maximum leakage rate for the

outdoor air intake dampers shall not exceed 2% when dampers are fully closed and

operating against a pressure differential of 0.5 IWG.

b. A unit-mounted potentiometer shall be provided to adjust the outdoor and return air

damper assembly to take in CFM of outdoor air to meet the minimum ventilation

requirement of the conditioned space during normal operation. During economizer

operation, a mixed-air temperature control shall modulate the outdoor and return

air damper assembly to prevent the supply air temperature from dropping below

55°F. Changeover from compressor to economizer operation shall be provided by

an integral electronic enthalpy control that feeds input into the basic module. The

outdoor intake opening shall be covered with a rain hood that matches the exterior

of the unit. Water eliminator/filters shall be provided. Simultaneous




economizer/compressor operation is also possible. Dampers shall fully close on

power loss.

8. Power Exhaust

a. Whenever the outdoor air intake dampers are opened for free cooling, the exhaust

fan will be energized to prevent the conditioned space from being over-pressurized

during economizer operation. The exhaust fan, motor and controls are installed and

wired at the factory. The rain hood must be assembled and installed in the field.

The power exhaust can only be used on bottom duct configurations.

9. Phase Monitor

a. Designed to prevent unit damage. The phase monitor will shut the unit down in an

out-of phase condition.

10. High Static Drive

11. Filters

a. Filters shall be 2" Pleated Filters, MERV 8

12. Disconnect Switch

a. A HACR breaker sized to the unit is provided.

13. Accessories

a. Low ambient Kit

b. CO2 Sensor

c. Humidity Sensors

d. Demand Control Ventilation

e. Hot Gas reheat

14. Controls

a. Unit Control Board

1) ASHRAE 62- 2001compliant. BTL certified. 2) Shall accept 20-30 VAC input power, 50/60Hz. 24 VAC nominal. 3) Operating temperature range from -40F to 158F; 10-90% RH (non-

condensing UI), and -4F to 158F; 10-90% Rh (non- condensing), with a

storage temperature range from -40F to 194F; 5-95% RH (non-condensing). 4) Shall include an option of and Economizer microprocessor controller which

communicates directly with the Unit Control Board and has 8 Analog

outputs, 2 Analog inputs, 2 Binary outputs, 3 Binary outputs.

5) Controller shall accept the following inputs: space temperature, return air

temperature sensor, setpoint adjustment, outdoor air temperature, indoor air

quality, outdoor air quality, indoor relative humidity, compressor lockout,

fire/smoke shutdown, single and dual enthalpy, fan status, remote time

clock, SA Bus communicated temperature/humidity/CO2 values from

Network sensors, FC Bus Network Overrides for space temperature, outdoor

air temperature, space humidity, outdoor air quality, Indoor air quality,

System purge.

6) Shall accept a single CO2 sensor or multiple CO2 sensors networked together

via communication bus in the conditioned space, and be Demand Control

Ventilation (DCV) ready. 7) Shall provide the following outputs: economizer, fan, cooling stage 1,

cooling stage 2, heat stage 1, heat stage 2, heat stage 3/ exhaust/ reversing

valve/ dehumidify/occupied. 8) Unit shall provide surge protection for the controller through a circuit

breaker. 9) Shall be Internet capable, and communicate at a Baud rate of 38.4K or

faster.




10) Shall have an LED display independently showing the status of activity on

the communication bus, and processor operation. 11) Unit shall incorporate a lockout circuit which provides reset capability at the

space thermostat or base unit should any of the following standard safety

devices trip and shut off compressor. If any of these safety devices trip, the

LCD screen will display alarm message indicating the specific safety device

that caused the lockout. a) Loss of charge/Low-pressure switch.

b) High-pressure switch.

c) Freeze condition sensor on evaporator coil.

12) Unit control board must support each usage case:

a) Conventional thermostat with low voltage input terminals for easy

installation

b) Communicating network sensors in the occupied space to provide

feedback on space conditions for unit control board to compare

with associated setpoints

c) Communication via BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU, N2 protocols

for integration into a building automation/management system

13) Anti-short cycle and low voltage protection features included.

14) Internal occupied/unoccupied scheduling

15) Unit control board shall permit cooling operation down to a selectable value

as low as 0 degrees F.

16) Shall allow for start-up, commissioning, troubleshooting, parameter

adjustment, setpoint adjustment via onboard display and navigable menu

with no additional interface tool or controls technician required.

17) The unit control board shall run a self-test diagnostics algorithm at startup

that operated the cooling cycle, heating cycle, fan operation. A status report

shall be provided upon completion of the diagnostic self-test.

18) Utilize any wi-fi enabled smart device to access the HVAC or multiple

HVAC units if communication wiring between them is present (FC Bus or

SA Bus). Remote access shall allow complete ability to perform start-up,

commissioning, troubleshooting, parameter adjustment, setpoint adjustment.

19) Local embedded trending and scheduling. Trending data and occupancy

scheduling predefined from the factory.

20) Occupancy schedule to be modified via control board joystick menu

navigation and remotely using a smart device (cellular phone, laptop, tablet)

21) A menu on the onboard screen shall display the unit status and allow

changing parameters where applicable. These include but are not limited to:

a) Demand Ventilation Mode – enable or disable

b) Operational Setpoint – display current value

c) Supply Air Temperature (SAT) – display current value

d) Return Air Temperature (RAT) – display current value

e) Operational Supply Humidity (OprSH) – display current value as

provided by a 0-10VDS input, SA Bus Network Sensor, or FC Bus

communicated value

f) Return Air Humidity (RAH) – display current value

g) Operational outdoor Air Temperature (OprOAT) – enthalpy calculated

from OAH 0-10VDC input to Economizer board and OprOAT only if

economizer is present




h) Operational Outdoor Air Humidity (OprOAH) – the buffered outdoor

air humidity. May be from economizer boards OAH 0-10VDC input

or FC Bus communicated value

i) Operational outdoor Air Quality (OprOAQ) – the buffered outdoor air

quality in use. May be from economizer boards OAQ 0-10VDC input

or FC Bus communicated value

j) Operational Indoor Air Quality (OprIAQ) – the buffered indoor air

quality in use. May be from economizer board IAQ 0-10VDC input,

SA Bus Network Sensor, or FC Bus communicated value

22) A menu shall display and allow modification to the following operations and

settings:

a) HVAC Zone Fan

b) Cooling

c) Heating

d) Economizer

e) Demand Ventilation

f) Power Exhaust

g) Sensors

h) Network


settings:

a) HVAC Zone – Occupied status

b) Indoor Fan status

c) Cooling status

d) Heating status

e) Economizer indication whether free-cooling is available or not

f) Enabling or disabling of Demand Ventilation

g) Power Exhaust

a. Enable/disable hot-gas reheat

b. Warmup/Cooldown

c. Title 24 Load Shed

d. Defrost


settings:

a) Firmware version (of UCB, Economizer, other peripheral boards)

b) Setting time zone

c) Network information

a. Device name that will appear on the FC Bus

b. Selection of communication protocol

c. Operational Baud Rate

d. Device ID


settings:

a) Version of firmware

b) Ability to Load new firmware

c) Create a backup file of the firmware and parameter setting via USB

port

d) Restore factory default parameter values and setup

e) Full and Partial Cloning of parameter setpoints from or to other units

f) Data trend exporting





settings:

a) Unit serial number, model number and name

b) Ability to reset Lockouts

c) Controller name

d) Displays the current values of all setpoints in use

e) Displays all current values for the indoor and outdoor zones

f) Displays current values related to:

a. Indoor Fan

b. Cooling

c. Heating

d. Heat Pump operation

e. Economizer operation

f. Power Exhaust

g. Demand Ventilation

h. Air monitoring station

i. Hot Gas Reheat

j. Smoke Control

g) Current information for inputs; including

a. Sensors

b. Coil Sensors

c. Thermostat

d. Binary Inputs

e. Unit Protection

f. Network Inputs

g. All outputs (relay and binary)

h) Self-Test

a. A patented self-test system that runs through a series of

algorithms to provide a report of all functioning

characteristics of the system at time of startup and

commissioning.

b. Auxiliary Control Boards

1) ASHRAE 62- 2001 compliant. BTL certified.

2) Economizer controller CEC Title 24 Compliant

a) Display alarms if the following occur

a. Economizer is economizing when conditions do not

support

b. Economizer is not economizing when conditions do

support

c. Damper Stuck

d. Excess Outdoor Air

e. Failed Sensor

b) Refrigeration Fault Detection & Diagnostics

a. There is insufficient refrigerant in any circuit

b. There is excessive refrigerant in any circuit

c. There is excessive refrigerant flow

d. There is insufficient refrigerant flow (restriction)

e. Inefficient compressor

f. Insufficient High-side heat transfer

g. Excessive High-side heat transfer (low ambient control

problem, low ΔP)




h. Insufficient Low-side heat transfer

i. Excessive Low-side heat transfer

j. Sensor fault- The liquid temperature is greater than the

condenser temperature (Could also be triggered if

refrigerant level is very low in the system)

k. Sensor fault- Sensor data is not available

l. The unit is off

m. The ambient temperature is too low

n. The ambient temperature is too high

o. The return air wet-bulb temperature is too low

p. The return air wet-bulb temperature is too high

q. Sensor fault- The condensing temperature is lower than the

ambient temperature (Could also be triggered when the

condenser is wet)

r. The suction line temperature is less than the evaporator

temperature

s. The evaporator temperature is greater than the ambient

temperature

t. The liquid temperature is lower than the ambient

temperature

u. Sensor fault- Suction temperature or ambient temperature

is invalid

v. Sensor fault- The return air dry-bulb or wet-bulb

temperature is invalid

w. Sensor fault- The liquid pressure or suction pressure is

invalid

x. Sensor fault- The suction line temperature is invalid

y. The return air dry-bulb temperature is too low

z. The return air dry-bulb temperature is too high

aa. The Efficiency Index is below 75% of ideal

bb. The Capacity Index is below 75% of ideal

c. Remote Accessibility

1) ASHRAE 62- 2001 compliant. BTL certified.

2) Provide the ability to adjust parameter values, setpoints, limits remotely

3) Connectivity to an Ethernet network via static IP address or Dynamic Name

Server (DNS)

4) Allow a maximum of 100 devices on the same FC bus trunk and accessed by

one remote device.

F. Manufacturer shall be Johnson Controls or approved equal.

2.2 INSULATED HORIZONTAL CURB

A. General Requirements

1. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and

factory-installed wood nailer, 2” base flange, cross channels/plenum dividers (as required),

supply air and return air plenum sections, duct attachment collar on openings; complying

with NRCA standards.




2. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.

b. Wall Insulation Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.

c. Floor Insulation Thickness: 1 inches

3. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal

surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when

applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a

temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric

depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

4. Curb Height: 30 inches.

B. Manufacturer shall be Thybar, Pate, Vibro-Acoustics or Kinetics Noise Control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before equipment installation. Reject

insulation materials and filter media that do not comply, or are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for units to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before

equipment installation.

D. Examine for suitable conditions where units will be installed.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be per manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and

balancing.

D. Comply with ANSI Z223.1 and CGA B149.1 or CGA B149.2 for field gas piping and venting.




3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest

roof drain.

B. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.

C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the

general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at roof curb.

2. Connect supply ducts to units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23

Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install return/exhaust-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report

results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized and crankcase heaters have

had sufficient on-time, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Enter or adjust all controller set-points as required to meet specific project requirements.

5. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.

6. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do

the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.




2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.

3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.

4. Inspect internal insulation.

5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

8. Verify that filters are installed.

9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.

10. Inspect for construction debris.

11. Remove packing from vibration isolators.

12. Inspect operation of dampers.

13. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.

14. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding.

15. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

16. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system.

b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature.

c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

17. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

18. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.

19. Calibrate thermostats/sensors.

20. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

21. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

22. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a

minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.

d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

23. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and

normal and emergency shutdown.

24. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on

fan curve.

25. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

26. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect

the following:

a. Low-temperature safety operation.

b. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.

c. Smoke and firestat alarms.

27. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing

filters with new filters.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.




B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing unit and air-distribution

systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING





Split System Air Conditioners 238126 - 1

SECTION 238126-SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-

condenser components.

1. Units are designed for exposed mounting.

2. The outdoor unit shall be a direct expansion (DX) air cooled air conditioning system.

3. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping lengths indicated on the drawings,

without any oil traps or additional equipment.



service.

1.3 ACTION SUBMTTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of

product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static

pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.


A. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system

units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product

Requirements."




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

C. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, “Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”

D. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 “Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”

E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

F. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of wall supports for units.

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with equipment supports.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty for parts and form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. For Parts: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

c. For Labor: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following

1. York

2. Mitsubishi

3. Daikin

4. Trane

2.2 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER- WALL MOUNT

A. Cabinet:




1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Fan: Direct drive

D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment."

1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and

permanent lubrication.

E. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

F. Provide integral condensate pumps.

2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels

for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide

brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.

Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,

relay, and contactor.

1. Compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-

pressure switch.

2. Refrigerant: R-410A

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with

ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

F. Low Ambient Kit.

G. Provide wall support.

H. Provide vibration isolation.

I. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Energy Standard for

Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings” and the International Energy Conservation

Code.




2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections "Sequence of

Operations for HVAC Controls."

B. Wired Wall thermostat

C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,

pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances.

B. Install per manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Install units level and plumb.

D. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

1. Refer to Division 23 Section “Mechanical Vibration Control” for vibration isolator

requirements.

E. Provide interconnecting wiring.

F. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators. Refer to Division 23

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit. Refer to Division 23 Section “Refrigerant Piping.”

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

B. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal

Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect outside ducts to split-

system air-conditioning units.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,

switches, and motor controls.





A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and

to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




Common Work Results For Electrical 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeve seals.

3. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 RELATED DISCIPLINES

A. As applicable, work under Division 28 shall be subject to the same requirements under Division

26.

1.4 CODES, LAWS AND ORDINANCES

A. Work under Divisions 26 and 28 shall conform to the applicable codes, laws, ordinances and

regulations for the project’s location.

B. The requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall take precedence over the

Drawings and these Specifications. Changes required by the AHJ shall only be made after

review by the Engineer.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. Wiring: Includes conductors, raceways, cables, fittings, boxes and other accessories that

comprise of a complete system.

C. Provide: To furnish and install all materials needed for a complete and operable system..

1.6 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIRMENTS

A. Refer to individual specification sections for submittal requirements.




B. Review of shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities for complying with


C. Submittal review by the Engineer is intended to assist Contractor in his ability to comply with

the Contract Documents. Review of submittal is only for general conformance with the design

concept as given in Contract Documents. Where Contractor Submittals do not clearly indicate

the intended materials for use, they may be returned without review or be rejected. Where

differences between Contract Documents and Submittals are not noted, Contractor shall comply

with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor accepts all responsibility for quantities,

dimensions, details, coordination of trades and job safety.

D. Definition:

1. Action Submittals: Submit to Engineer for review.

2. Informational Submittals: Provide submittals in Operational and Maintenance Manuals.

E. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 20 working (business) days for initial review of each submittal.

Allow Additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer

will advise Architect when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal review: Allow 15 working (business) days for each resubmittal.

3. Engineer will review an initial submittal and one (1) resubmittal. Any additional reviews

shall be billed to the General Contractor on an hourly basis at the Engineers current

billing rates and will not be returned to the General Contractor until payment has been

received. This shall not be cause for any delay claims or additional compensation claims


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce

headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other

installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

4. So connecting raceways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space

of other equipment.

B. In general, boxes, devices and equipment shall be accessible through the removable panels in

the ceiling. Where ceilings are not removable and in walls where access is required for service,

access panels shall be provided. Access panels shall be appropriate for the finish in which they

are installed, with a fire rating to match the wall or ceiling in which they are installed.

Coordinate with other divisions and group boxes, devices and equipment together to keep the

required number of access panels to a minimum.





A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities unless

permitted under the following conditions:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

1.9 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Items shown and not specifically called for, items specified and not specifically

indicated/detailed on the drawings, or items neither specified nor shown but which are

reasonably incidental to and commonly required to make a complete job, shall be provided.

1.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect materials and equipment from damage.

B. Cap or plug openings in equipment and conduits.

1.11 VARIANCES

A. Where conflicts exist within the Contract Documents, request clarification prior to submission

of bid. If clarification is not requested, provide the work representing the higher cost and

quantity.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. During the warranty period, make the proper adjustments to systems, equipment and devices

installed and perform work necessary to ensure the efficient and proper functioning of the

systems, equipment or devices.

B. All equipment, labor and systems shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for period of two years

minimum unless otherwise noted after the date of substantial completion. Contractor shall be

fully responsible for all repairs and adjustments to equipment and systems during this guaranty

period.

C. Repairs and replacements: If the Owner finds work that is defective, inferior or not in

compliance with the Contract during the guarantee period the Owner will inform the Contractor

in writing. The Contractor shall promptly perform the following at no additional cost to the

owner:

1. Replace all defective work in a satisfactory manner.

2. Correct all damage to the building or contents which occurred due to the defective work.




D. The Owner may choose to have defective work corrected at the expense of the Contractor if the

Contractor fails to proceed promptly to repair defective work in an accordance with this

guarantee.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS TO BE USED

A. Where items are specified by designations such as trade name, manufacturer’s name, catalog

number indicate the capacity and quality of the products or materials to be used on this project.

B. Only products indicated within the Contract Documents by name, series and/or model number

have been coordinated with other trades. Coordinate items of other manufacturers with other

trades.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers shall be:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

e. Or equal.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANNER OF INSTALLATION

A. The Drawings are generally indicative of the work to be installed, but they do not show all

offsets, fittings and similar details required, which shall be provided to meet the job conditions.

In areas where work is installed in close proximity to work of other trades or within trades

covered by this Division of the Specifications, prepare larger scale drawings consisting of plans

and sections to show how work is to be installed in relation to work of other trades.




3.2 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of suspended items and to center of wall-

mounting items unless otherwise noted.

B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom

consistent with these requirements.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components

of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to

facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways penetrate concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated

floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete or Masonry Walls: Core-drill existing as necessary.

C. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls: Seal annular space between raceway and wall

using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

D. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions and

ceilings at raceway penetrations. Seal raceway penetrations with firestop materials.

E. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material

and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in

annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause

sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated wall assemblies for electrical installations to

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation

requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



A Squared Plus Engineering Support Group, LLC M-139-170-003

Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.




intended use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

3. General Cable Corporation.

4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

5. Southwire Company.

6. Or equal.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.




2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

6. Or equal.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN,

single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Branch Circuits and Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits and Feeders Concealed in below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

E. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal power and control circuits and/or feeders in walls and ceilings of finished spaces where

possible.

B. Use manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.




C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

D. Exposed power and control circuits and/or feeders shall be installed parallel and perpendicular

to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent

or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.



1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above.




Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables 260523 - 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Low-voltage control cabling.

2. Control-circuit conductors.

3. Identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for

Electrical Systems."

2.2 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.




2.3 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF,

complying with UL 83, in raceway.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS



2. HellermannTyton.

3. Kroy LLC.

4. Panduit Corp.

5. Or equal.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating

adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"

for installation of conduits and wireways.

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.


A. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.

2. Cables may not be spliced.

3. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat

lamps shall not be used for heating.

B. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:




1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1, No 14 AWG minimum.

2. Class 2, No. 16 AWG minimum.

3. Class 3, No 12 AWG minimum.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for

Electrical Systems."




Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526-GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





intended use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable

Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of

conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,

with at least two bolts.




1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad; 3/4 inch diameter by10 feet long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors.

3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 24 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade.

2. For grounding electrode system, space rods at least one-rod length from each other and

connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.




1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, to main metal water service entrances to

building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a

bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the

applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

d. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

e. Or equal.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to

MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and

sizes of raceway to be supported.

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

5) Or equal.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials in which used.




a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

6) Or equal.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with

ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system,

sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified

design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits systems above suspended ceilings and for

fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may

be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.




C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or

greater.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

disconnect switches, pull and junction boxes, and other devices on slotted-channel racks

attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair

paint.




Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533-RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

D. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings and handholes.




intended use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING



1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

2. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

3. Or equal.




B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT: NEMA FB 1;

listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which

installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel set-screw or compression type.

G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in connector assemblies, and

compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and

enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING



1. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

2. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

3. Or equal.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

4. Or equal.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, adapters, hold-down straps, end

caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.




2.4 BOXES



1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

4. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

5. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

6. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

7. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

8. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

9. Or equal.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed

cover.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard

enamel finish in color selected by Owner. Sized per NEC and manufacturer’s requirements for

quantities and sizes of conductors contained within.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

d. Or equal.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description:

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.

2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless


3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.




5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a

combination of the two.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. CDR Systems Corporation.

d. NewBasis.

e. Or equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.

2. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

5. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations,

Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer

concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety

Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete, SCTE 77,

Tier 8 structural load rating.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Branch Circuits Only in Unfinished Spaces: EMT.

2. Concealed Branch Circuit in Ceilings: EMT.

3. Exposed or Concealed Feeders: Rigid steel conduit.

4. Exposed Branch Circuit in Finished Spaces: Surface mounted raceway.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

C. Minimum Conduit Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.




1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run.

E. Conceal conduit within finished areas where possible.

F. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

H. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with

listed sealing compound. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

I. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment

subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.

2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction.

3. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at equipment.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete.




3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: Set so cover surface is 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 ISTALLATION OF SURFACE METAL RACEWAY

A. Routing of surface metal raceway to be reviewed and approved by Owner prior to installation.

Installation of surface metal raceway shall be kept to an absolute minimum.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.




Identification For Electrical Systems 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553-IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Underground-line warning tape.

5. Equipment identification labels.


A. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.


1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, colors, and other features with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and

manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage.




C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,

flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching

wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use

with self-locking cable tie fastener.

2.2 CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend

label.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend

label.

2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE.

C. Type IID:

1. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven

scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the

continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 8 mils.

3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil.

4. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft.




5. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf and 12,500 psi.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-

gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.6 CABLE TIES

A. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,

self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways: Each color-coding band shall

completely encircle conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by

side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls, at 50-foot maximum

intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor at a location with high visibility and

accessibility.

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use UV-stabilized nylon type.

H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 12 inches below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches

overall.




3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30A,

and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum

intervals.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction

boxes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or

taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible

unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape.

D. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with diagrams and/or schedules.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic label. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-

1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic label. Unless otherwise

indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high

label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of

the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of indicating added or modified branch

circuits.

b. Enclosed switches.

c. Enclosed controllers.




Panelboards 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416-PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard and overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and

components indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,

performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of

installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics and ratings of individual overcurrent protective devices.




B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.





A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.


1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning

and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting

of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.




D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression or Mechanical type.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression or Mechanical type.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one

or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


following:

1. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (No Substitutions)

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Main circuit breakers. Ratings as indicated on Drawings.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, same manufacturer as panelboards.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity as

indicated on Drawings.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Compression or Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type HACR for motor loads.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have

been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount top of trim 78 inches above finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a

nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.






to assist in testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove

front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record

for device.

E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.




Wiring Devices 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726-WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one

source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and

associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.



intended use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when

device is tripped.




B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper.

b. Pass & Seymour.

c. Or equal.

2.2 WALL PLATES

A. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-

resistant, thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Color: To match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of debris.

B. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

C. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.




7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

D. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,

stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and

durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99.

Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.




Fuses 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813-FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single

source from single manufacturer.



C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more

than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size

and with system short-circuit current levels.



Fuses 262813 - 2

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

two of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Edison Fuse, Inc.

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

4. Littelfuse, Inc.

5. Or equal.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent

with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically

damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes

and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to

fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



Fuses 262813 - 3

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class RK1, time delay.

2. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay.

3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside

door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.




Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816-ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Circuit Breakers

4. Enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include

dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features,

performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).


A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches, components, and accessories, within same

product category, from single source from single manufacturer.




D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.


3. Comply with NFPA 70E.




1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches and components with equipment served and

adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for

equipment access doors and panels.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

two of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES




B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with

capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are

specified.

4. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

5. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES







B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturer: Eaton. To match existing.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with

interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and

instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for

circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

E. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor material.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with

environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."







3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and

circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

B. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.




B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.




Enclosed Controllers 262913 - 1

SECTION 262913-ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on

features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.






A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent

condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive

substances, and physical damage.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including

conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and

required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general

purpose, Class A.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button

action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers


the following:

a. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (No Substitutions)

2. Configuration: Nonreversing.

3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting.

5. Green pilot light.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed

location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall.




B. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load

amperes after motors have been installed.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

3. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before

starting the motor(s).

4. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.

5. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.



B. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed

controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,

remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to





Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security 280513 - 1

SECTION 280513-CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire alarm wire and cable.

2. Identification products.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for

Electrical Systems.”

B. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2.2 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE


following:

1. Comtran Corporation.

2. Draka Cableteq USA.

3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.

4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp.

5. West Penn Wire; a brand of Belden Inc.

6. Or equal.

B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70,

Article 760.




C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI,

for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as

complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded

insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS


following:


2. HellermannTyton.

3. Kroy LLC.

4. Or eqaul.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating

adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

for installation of conduits.

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems." for installation of supports for pathways, conductors and cables.

3.3 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal raceways. Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.

Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share

conduit with other building wiring systems.




B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing

bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to

sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in

any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal

according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal

spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.


3.5 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system

shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any

other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated

with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the

same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and

back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.

Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with

the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring

diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type

terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or

equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code of fire alarm conductors shall match existing. Paint fire alarm

system junction boxes and covers red.

3.6 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.




3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated wall assemblies for electrical installations to

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


July 12, 2021 Replace Fitness Center A/C Camp Readiness Center


Fire Alarm System 283111 - 1

SECTION 283111-FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. System smoke detectors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For each type of product indicated. Include plans, details, and attachments to

other work.

1. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.

2. Include battery-size calculations.

3. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that

each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity

possible when air-handling system is operating.

4. Include floor plans to indicate final device locations. Show size and route of cable and

conduits.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation

of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from

single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as,

an extension of existing system.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the existing

system manufacturer.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. The existing operations and functions of the existing system, components and device shall be

maintained. Unless otherwise dictated by the Authority Having Jurisdictions (AHJ), activation

of new duct type smoke detectors shall initiate a fire-alarm signal.

B. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in new circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing of new alarm-initiating initiating devices.

2.3 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to existing fire-

alarm control unit.

3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection to building wiring.

4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-

on status.

B. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Existing fire alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detectors.

2. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

3. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

4. Provide and wire a remote wall mounted test/status indicator station for each duct

detector. See Drawings for locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of new fire-alarm equipment and devices.




B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before

making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing system.

2. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment/system as necessary to

extend existing functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of

merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. Perform tests and inspections.



to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,

Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire

Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of

the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the

"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm

Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"

Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.




D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added

devices and appliances.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



PROJECT MANUAL ngineering upport roup , LLC REPLACE ...

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL ngineering upport roup , LLC REPLACE ...